Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Questionnaire Sap Fico Enterprise Structure
Questionnaire Sap Fico Enterprise Structure
Questions:
Q: 1) How do you plan the processing of a maintenance notification? Do you use tasks
during processing?
A:
A:
Explanation: Who is involved? Which partner functions do they have? How are they
represented in the system?
A:
Explanation: In Customizing, you can define follow-up actions for tasks that are triggered
automatically for defined business operations. You can therefore define chains of follow-up
actions, which the system executes in order.
A:
A:
Explanation: If you do not enter costs for maintenance work in your organization, you can
use tasks to plan the individual processing operations, without having to use a maintenance
order.
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment was
broken, damage, cause of damage) about a maintanence problem in order to create a service
history or to enable further evaluations?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technically
completed?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technical
information? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want to
have codes.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to archive notifications? If so, provide a copy of your document archiving
policy. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements.
A:
1.1.2. Order
1.1.2.1. Order Creation/Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) What different types of maintenance do you have in your company (for example,
preventive maintenance, repair, installation)? Create a list of the maintenance types and
outline the differences in planning and execution.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Mark in the following list whether maintenance tasks are performed by employees
and/or contractors.
A:
Q: 3) What information about labor resources (for example, availability and number of
people, duration of work, split of operation) do you require from the system when planning
maintenance orders?
A:
Q: 4) How do you proceed with an external assignment with the sub-contractor? Choose
one or more of the following options.
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in a
single form?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 8) Do you want to configure a special search help for partners in your order?
Explanation: For example, a search help for particular people (with particular qualifications),
which are assigned to a particular work center. For the partner function of type "Person", it is
possible to set an indicator for a special search help for partners.
A:
Q: 9) For which operation types do you want to represent the operation description using
service specifications?
A:
Q: 10) Do you want to define skills and/or qualifications for maintenance order operations?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Do you provide the technicians who perform the preventive maintenance with a list of
activities? If yes, how detailed are they?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) If yes, which of the following types of task lists do you require?
A:
Q: 14) Do you assign materials (spare parts) to work orders during the planning phase?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 15) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, daily
requirements, individual requirements)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planning
phase?
A:
Q: 17) Do you want to generate purchase requisitions and reservations when the order is
created?
Explanation: You can configure whether reservations and purchase requisitions are
generated when the order is created or only when the order is released.
A:
Q: 18) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance order
during the planning phase?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 20) How do you want to plan special tools, documents and so on, which are required to
execute maintenance activities?
A:
Q: 21) Do you use work order permits, for example, to manage working conditions or safety
matters?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 22) At what intervals do you want to schedule work (for example, daily, weekly,
monthly)?
A:
A:
Q: 24) At which level do you plan work (for example, for a shift, crew, skill, qualification, or
an individual person and so on)?
A:
Q: 25) How detailed is your planning (for example, usage backlog, capacity evaluation,
capacity scheduling)?
A:
Q: 26) Should the capacity load, which was formed for all the capacity types of the PP work
centers, be reduced for the duration of a maintenance task planned in a work order?
A:
A:
Q: 28) Do you use maintenance orders for processing investment measures? If yes, should
the asset under construction be created automatically or manually?
A:
Q: 29) Do you want the maintenance order to be integrated with one of the following
Controlling components?
A:
1.1.2.2. Material Planning
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you assign materials (spare parts) to work orders during the planning phase?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 3) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, daily
requirements, individual requirements)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planning
phase?
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance order
during the planning phase?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard to
working conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Explanation: For example, for orders generated automatically from maintenance planning.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What should be the relationship between the objects in Work Clearance Management
(order, work approval, work clearance application, work clearance document and so on)?
A:
Q: 2) Do conflicts exist between the conditions of different technical objects? Define these.
A:
Q: 3) Which different approval steps are required for your work clearance process?
Describe the concept or process flow of your approval process.
A:
A:
Q: 5) Which employee should be informed about which subject or object condition at which
time?
A:
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Identify the internal papers that you require for the different people and order types
involved (for example, job ticket for employee, picking list).
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Note: This process is only for maintenance activities performed manually on technical
systems by the technician.
A:
Explanation: Rough decription of process flow, the way in which the employee executing the
task obtains the necessary materials.
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Do you want to change capacity/work centers for periods with overload? (If yes,
consider changing the work center/assignment/activity dates manually from the evaluation
reports.)
A:
Q: 3) Do you do short term capacity planning? (If yes, ensure the time horizon for the
capacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period. If no, ensure the time horizon for the
capacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period.)
A:
A:
Q: 5) Are resources to be shared across departments (for example plant maintenance and
projects)?
Explanation: If yes, consider how you want to define the priorities between the departments
and make sure that you can use different order types at the work center.
A:
A:
1.1.3.2. Capacity Dispatching and Leveling
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you process the overload on capacities/wk centers? (If yes, you could use the
capacity leveling functions- dispatching and deallocating).
A:
Q: 2) Do you prefer to use a graphical planning tool for capacity leveling? (If yes, use the
graphical capacity planning tool If no, consider using the tabular capacity planning tool.)
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 4) When you split order operations, do you want the system to create capacity loads
automatically for individual people?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: See the release note for 4.6C: "Automatic Creation of Employee Requirements
Records (Splits)".
A:
A:
A:
1.1.4. Modification of Technical Systems
1.1.4.1. Installation, Dismantling and Modification of Equipment
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Explanation: For example, the maintenance planner, maintenance engineer and so on.
A:
Q: 7) Do changes also have to be made to the system master during modification work?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post their
withdrawal in the system?
A:
Q: 5) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?
A:
Q: 6) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work
order?
A:
Q: 7) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,
available stock, etc.)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 11) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what
information do they contain?
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Are the completion confirmations in your company entered at the level of personnel
number?
Explanation: This function is required for CATS; it can be used with transaction IW41.
A:
Explanation: The permit function for completion confirmations is realized using CATS.
A:
Q: 5) Do you also want to confirm used material at the same time as the time confirmation?
Explanation: This function is limited using CATS, since it involves a jump to the goods issue
transaction in inventory management.
A:
Q: 6) Should the technical completion (for example, for breakdown times, causes of
damage, tasks and so on) be made at the same time as the time confirmation?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 7) Do you also want to enter measurement readings with the completion confirmation?
Explanation: Measurement documents can also be entered at the same time using
transaction IW41.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Do you create completion confirmations centrally, or does each employee enter their
own times themselves?
A:
Explanation: Is required for the entry of a central completion confirmation. Requires print
settings (possibly SAPScript).
A:
Q: 11) How many times per day do your employees enter their working time?
A:
Q: 12) Will you use a Plant Data Collection (PDC) system for your completion
confirmations?
A:
Q: 13) Do you enter the working times of contractors? If yes, how should the external
services be entered?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
1.1.6.1. Individual Time Confirmation
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you differentiate the times entered according to other activity types (for example,
to distinguish between normal work hours and overtime)?
A:
A:
Q: 4) In what unit and with what accuracy do you want to enter services?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) In which systems do you track employee master data? Are wage rates only
maintained in the R/3 System or in other systems too?
A:
Q: 2) Do you use this data as a basis for indirect activity allocation to cost objects, cost
centers, internal orders and so on?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Explain how such a time sheet is structured today and how it should be structured in
future (what information do you need on the time sheet?).
A:
Q: 4) Does everyone who records working time have a personal number in HR? (If not,
CATS is not supported.)
Explanation: You require at least one HR mini master record before you can use CATS.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: Depending on the person entering the information, different time profiles can be
created. For example, an administrator can enter times for many employees.
A:
A:
Q: 7) Are the labor costs calculated based on actual costs or standard rates?
A:
A:
Q: 9) Please explain the procedure, how employees in your company track and report time
today.
Explanation: For example, how do your developers in Research & Development determine
the time available for their projects: manually on paper, manually in Excel and so on?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 11) Are there special conditions for labor costs when employees work in different
countries or for different profit centers (for example, if an employee from the UK works on a
project in Germany)?
A:
A:
Q: 13) How do your employees enter trip costs? Are the trips linked to the recording of
working time? Describe in detail.
A:
A:
Q: 15) Identify the different categories of activity (activity types) that you use for estimation,
planning and settlement purposes?
A:
Q: 16) What are the various cost collectors, to which employees will charge time (for
example, cost centers, projects, internal orders)?
A:
Q: 17) Do sub-contractors and other third party labor sources have to enter work using
timesheets?
A:
Q: 18) Are these external services settled to a cost center or directly to the project?
A:
A:
Q: 20) How is the cost of overtime calculated? Do you have different types of overtime (for
example, time and a half, double time)?
A:
Q: 21) Do you track indirect labor hours, such as vacation, sickness, holiday...? If yes,
define the categories you require and their entry type.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 22) Which financial entries do you currently make for your labor distribution?
A:
Q: 23) How do employees record their working time (time, detail, medium/system)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What is your current timesheet approval strategy for employees and external
services?
A:
Q: 2) Explain the permit procedure for working time or recording of activity allocation for
your employees.
A:
A:
Q: 4) How many employees does the person responsible for approval manage?
Explanation: Consider using the CATS workflow to automate the approval process.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to transfer recorded activity allocations to Controlling using the time
sheet?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) How often does this transfer take place (daily, weekly and so on)?
A:
Q: 3) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,
employee hours by cost center)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,
employee hours by cost center)?
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you need an evaluation, do see the days on which personnel enter more than a
defined number of hours?
A:
Q: 4) Do you have to see the employee name in the documents for the receiving
component?
A:
Q: 5) Do different roles need to see different timesheet information? (If yes, create report
variants.)
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment was
broken, damage, cause of damage) about a maintanence problem in order to create a service
history or to enable further evaluations?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technically
completed?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technical
information? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want to
have codes.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you measure and record the current condition of your equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? Describe the different measuring points
and counters that you require for the different pieces of equipment.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) How often and according to which rules do you want to settle orders ?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Do you want to examine your cost elements for the settlement of orders in greater
detail?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Who decides whether the work is fully completed (business completion) and when?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to archive orders? If so, please provide a copy of your document
archiving policy. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements.
A:
Q: 2) How long do you want to retain orders in the system before they are archived?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you create historical orders to keep track of maintenance work that has already
been completed?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
B. Organization
C.
D.
E. General Settings
F.
G.
H. Master Data
1. General Master Records
1.1. Material Master
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) What is the default sales unit in sales processing and what are alternative sales
units?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do you group similar products together (for example, in divisions or material groups)?
A:
Q: 7) Do you maintain additional statuses for your materials (such as sales status)?
A:
Q: 8) If you have multiple plants, is your material normally supplied by a specific plant?
A:
Q: 9) Do you maintain additional types of grouping for other processes (for example, rebate,
statistics, commission or pricing)?
A:
Q: 10) Is the creation of a multi-level hierarchy necessary for materials (product hierarchy)?
A:
Q: 11) Do you record a minimum delivery quantity on your materials? If so, what happens
during sales order processing if a violation occurs?
A:
Q: 12) Are there materials that must be shipped in certain multiples (delivery units)?
A:
A:
Q: 14) Can a material have different values in one plant? What are the criteria for the
different values?
A:
Q: 15) According to which criteria, does your material master data let you select with regard
to planned QM processes (for example, goods receipt inspection only for raw materials etc)?
A:
A:
Q: 17) Are the technical delivery terms stored online, and will you print these terms with
each purchase order?
A:
A:
Q: 19) Do you require your vendors to provide samples for approval prior to actual delivery?
Please describe.
A:
Q: 20) Do you block a vendor invoice for payment until the quality inspection has been
successfully completed?
A:
Q: 21) Will you process recurring inspections for materials? (Note: This is only possible for
batch-managed materials). Please provide an example.
A:
A:
Q: 23) Do you want to maintain a source list for the material types you will procure?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 24) Do you value your materials using a standard price, a moving average price, or
different valuation methods for different materials?
A:
Q: 25) Each material must belong to exactly one material group. Which material groups do
you need to organize your materials?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 27) How many different G/L accounts do you need for inventory?
A:
Q: 28) Will you maintain specification data for your hazardous substances?
A:
Q: 29) Are separate material master records (perhaps with a separate material type or
numbering system) used in the development and engineering/design processes? How and
when are they converted to operational material number and type)?
A:
Q: 30) Do you use other systems (such as service management or costing) that need
material master records from R/3 and therefore a permanent interface?
A:
Q: 31) Describe the structure and numbering system for material numbers
(internal/external, specific to material type, other criteria).
A:
Q: 32) Which material types do you use (please complete): FERT, HALB, ROH, KMAT,
HAWA, FMHI, ...?
A:
Q: 33) Do you maintain multilingual descriptions for materials? Which languages are
relevant? How and when are they translated?
A:
A:
Q: 35) Please describe the process for creating and adding to material data. Include release
procedure/status, important sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities,
authorizations, involved systems, and so on.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 38) Do you need to customize the appearance of or add data fields to the material
master record (additional fields, customized material master, field selection, customer-specific
field checks)?
A:
Q: 39) Do you use classification for your material masters? For what reasons (storing
addition information, search functionality, or variant configuration)?
A:
Q: 40) Do you classify standardized parts by loading DIN classes and characteristic data
records?
A:
Q: 41) Do you have different valuation techniques (for example, standard versus moving
average)? If so, please explain which.
A:
Q: 42) Do you have inventory valued in different currencies at the same facility?
A:
A:
Q: 44) For a material is there a main delivery location for a sales department?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 45) PM/CS: Do you need a material master especially for plant maintenance / customer
service with reduced information (just basic data and classification data)?
A:
Q: 46) PM/CS: Do your maintenance or service equipment include major components that
you want to deal with individually to compile separate histories? If so, describe these
components.
A:
A:
Q: 2) Do you need to use different BOMs for different applications, such as Production,
Engineering, Plant Maintenance, and Costing (BOM usage)?
A:
Q: 3) Do you use group BOMs for engineering/design and copy or assign them to plants at
implementation?
A:
Q: 4) What change management functions do you require? How do you want to define the
validity of BOMs (based on date/freely definable parameters)? Must existing change histories
be transferred to the R/3 System?
A:
Q: 5) Do you use other validity types (such as serial number, time period, or customer) in
addition to the "Valid from" date to control the validity of your BOM changes?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) Do you need a complete history of your BOM changes? For what reasons
(documentation, different technical states in operational areas, other)? For what types of
BOMs? From what point in time (initial released status, other)?
A:
Q: 8) Describe the process for creating and adding to material BOMs. Include release
procedure/status, notifications, responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, Engineering
Change Management, and so on.
A:
Q: 9) Describe the change process for material BOMs. Include release procedure/status,
notifications, responsibilities, authorizations, involved systems, engineering change
management,revision levels, synchronization with current production orders, other.
A:
Q: 10) Do you want to use one BOM to represent several similar materials (closed variant
BOM)?
A:
Q: 11) Do you have several alternative BOMs for a material, depending on the
manufacturing procedure or lot size, for example (multiple BOM)?
A:
Q: 12) Do you have products with a large number of variants? Do you need Variant
Configuration?
A:
Q: 13) Which BOM maintenance functions do you require (copy functions, mass changes,
and so on)?
A:
Q: 14) What structure do your BOMs have? How many levels are there? How many
components are there on each level?
A:
Q: 15) Do your single-level BOMs represent production levels and do you keep your BOM
header materials in stock? If not, do you produce non-stock items, or are some assemblies
just used as structural elements in a BOM?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 17) Which item categories (stock items, non-stock items, documents, texts) do you use?
A:
A:
Q: 19) Do you have recursive BOMs (the product contains a component with the same
material number as the superior assembly)?
A:
Q: 20) Do you use other systems (such as service management or costing) that need
material master records from R/3 and therefore a permanent interface?
A:
Q: 21) Is an integration to external systems such as CAD systems or local PDM systems
needed to transfer BOM data to the R/3 System? Please define your requirements for
integration (online, batch, controlled redundancy, post-processing in R/3, other).
A:
Q: 22) If you use alternative items (one component can be replaced by another one), how
do you want one of several alternatives to be determined automatically?
A:
Q: 23) Do you require mass changes for BOM maintenance? Please explain.
A:
Q: 24) If you use alternative BOMs (several BOM structures exist parallel for the same
product at the same time), how do you want one of several alternatives to be determined
automatically (by production version, lot size, or time)?
A:
A:
Q: 26) Approximately how many finished products and assemblies (header materials with
BOMs) do you have?
A:
A:
Q: 28) Do you plan and cost the scrap expected in production? Please explain.
A:
Q: 29) Do you produce co-products during the same process as the main product? (These
items are treated as material credit memos for costing and reduce manufacturing costs.)
A:
Q: 30) Lead time offset: Are all your components to be staged at the same time?
A:
Q: 1) Is it necessary for you to procure services from external suppliers? If so, do you want
to structure and manage these services? What kind of services do you procure?
A:
1.4. Batch
1.4.1. Batch Master
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) General: Do you want to copy the batch numbers from your vendors into the SAP
System? Do you want this to be entered using a batch master record or a characteristic
(classification)?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 5) Batch level: Do your batches have to be unique at a plant level, cross-plant at material
level or customer level?
A:
Q: 6) Batch level: Do you want some materials to be handled in batches in some plants and
not in others?
A:
Q: 7) Batch level: Do you transfer batches among different plants? Do you want the
transferred batch to be known in the receiving plant? (plant level or cross-plant level)
A:
Q: 8) Batch level: If it is cross-plant, is it possible that you must assign the same batch
number to different materials? (material level or customer level)
A:
A:
Q: 10) Batch number: Do want to automatically create batches for goods movement or for
the material you want to produce in the order?
A:
Q: 11) Batch number: Do you want to explain how your batch numbers are set up?
A:
Q: 12) Batch status management: Do you want to represent the usability of a batch using
batch status management?
A:
Q: 13) Batch status management: In what way are batches released and who is responsible
for their release?
A:
Q: 14) Batch status management: Do you have to manage the status of a batch as a cross-
storage location or a cross-stock type?
A:
Q: 15) Batch specifications: Do you want to describe the technical, physical and/or chemical
properties of a batch using characteristics and characteristic values?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 16) Batch specifications: Can you group certain materials based on a common
specification to classes?
A:
Q: 17) Batch specifications: When do you assign values to characteristics? Where does the
information for the value assignment come from? (for example, from the result summary in
QM)
A:
Q: 18) Batch determination: Do you need batch determination in order to find goods
movements from a warehouse that have a certain specification? In which areas (inventory ma
nagement, production, sales and distribution) do you use batch determination?
A:
Q: 19) Batch determination: What criteria do you want to use to find and sort the batches?
(batch-find strategy)
A:
Q: 20) Batch determination: Define a batch-find strategy in order to set which conditions
(criteria) you want to use to find batches.
A:
Q: 21) Batch determination: For performance reasons, it is recommended that some SAP
standard characteristics, such as deletion indicator or batch status, are included in th e
selection class,
A:
Q: 22) Batch where-used list: Do you want to document the path of a batch through the
enterprise using a batch where-used list? (for liability reasons)
A:
Q: 23) Active ingredient management: Do you want to manage materials with active
ingredients that are to be handled with batches?
A:
Q: 24) Active ingredient management: Do you have materials that have the amount of
active ingredients or fixed components managed in percent (%)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 25) Active ingredient management: Do you have material that must be managed using
two different measuring units, such as ounces and grams? Is the relationship between them a
percent or can it be defined freely?
A:
Q: 26) Active ingredient management: Is the price based on the amount of ingredients? Do
you order raw materials in ingredient units of measure?
A:
Q: 27) Active ingredient management: Do you want to carry out a batch determination
based on ingredient amounts?
A:
Q: 28) Do you want to manage and track materials by batch? If yes, specify the materials
or groups of material.
A:
Q: 29) Do you want to manage and track materials by expiration date? If yes, specify the
materials or groups of material, also specify if you wish to see the total shelf life of the
material, or the remining shelf life.
A:
Q: 30) Do you have any materials where you keep track of the amount of active ingredients;
or percent solids?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Define the characteristics that are important when searching for a batch of a material,
such as color, weight, expiration date (selection class).
A:
Q: 3) When selecting material from batches that have met the criteria in the previous
question, what rules do you follow (FIFO or LIFO, quality, other)?
A:
Q: 4) When searching for a batch, what key information do you use (strategy type)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 7) Does the material for a sales order have to be taken from only one batch, or are batch
splits allowed?
A:
Q: 1) Are there serialized objects in your company? If so, which objects do you want to
serialize?
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to manage further information using serial numbers (for example, serial
numbers for equipment in maintenance or service) in addition to inventory management
information?
A:
Q: 4) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: is there a serial number to identify each
piece of equipment (from your production department and/or from the manufacturer)?
A:
Q: 5) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: If there are serial numbers, on which level
do you want to track history (include costing, statistics, and so on)?
A:
Q: 6) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: do you want to create your own serial
numbers, or do you use the manufacturer's serial number as a reference/key for that object?
A:
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
Requirement Gathering Questions
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
Q: 8) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
A:
Q: 2) Do you require that your customers send you pallet identification information?
A:
Q: 3) If you do not receive pallet identification information from your customers, do you
execute goods receipt processing based on pallets or material combinations?
A:
Q: 4) Are the pallets that are shown handled as a homogeneous unit using more than one
goods movement?
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do you use picking and packaging functions with scanners (radio frequency)?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 9) During quality checks, do you transport the pallets to other storage locations before
the usage decision?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you already have packaging requirements for you warehouse personnel? Are the
packaging requirements customer-based?
A:
Q: 12) Do you prepare raw materials for a production order on a scale and do you have to
ensure that exactly this material combination is used in the order?
A:
Q: 13) Do you want to control whether goods in the goods receipt zone are displayed in the
availability check?
A:
Q: 1) Do you have different types of work centers and what are the differences between
them (e.g. labor work centers, machine work centers, production line)?
A:
Q: 2) To what other master data are your work centers linked (cost center etc.)?
A:
Q: 3) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you require
standard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)?
A:
Q: 4) Should default values be maintained in the work center, which can be transferred into
routings?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) Does every work center have a standard capacity or do you maintain shift intervals?
A:
A:
Q: 9) Are certain types of maintenance work always carried out by external contractors? If
so, please list and describe these types of maintenance work.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 12) Are you going to be scheduling labor resources within your networks? (If yes, use
workcenters.)
A:
Q: 13) Will you be doing cost planning on networks? (If yes, you will need work centers.)
A:
Q: 14) Do you tend to plan labor resources at a department or individual level? (For both,
consider the work center capacity and HR assignment configuration requirements).
A:
Q: 15) It is possible to have a work center that includes both people and machines. Do you
have multiple uses for your work centers?
A:
Q: 16) The work center controls the formula for controlling scheduling. Do you have special
work center scheduling requirements?
A:
Q: 17) Work centers provide the basis for capacity planning. Do you want to manage
capacities for your projects?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 18) Will you be using PP and PS functionality? (If yes, carefully consider the integration
and processes between the PP and PS work centers for capacity planning.)
A:
Q: 1) Which types of business partner do you have? For example, sole proprietor, legal
person, employees, foreign, other?
A:
Q: 2) How many active customers do you intend to transfer to your R/3 System?
A:
A:
A:
Explanation: SAP partner functions are used to determine all possible functions that a
business partner can take on (for example, the ordering party - sold-to party, the recipient of
goods - ship-to party, and the party that has to pay - payer).
A:
Q: 6) Which partner functions are used for the different sales documents?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 13) Do you want to record any specific marketing information (for example, Nielsen IDs,
customer classification)?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 16) Does your customer allow you to combine different sales orders into one delivery?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 18) If you have multiple plants, is your customer normally supplied by a specific plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 19) Define your customer delivery priority levels and explain the assignment process.
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 21) Do you record foreign trade customers who are placed on an export control list to
possibly deny deliveries to them?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 24) Are there any discounts linked to terms of payment, such as cash discounts?
A:
Q: 25) Do you have sales documents in foreign currencies? Describe how the exchange
rate is calculated.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 28) What Incoterms will your customers use (for example, FOB, free domicile)?
A:
A:
Q: 30) Which texts are used for the different sales documents (for sales, shipping, billing)?
A:
A:
Q: 32) Do you use the same structure of customer master records in all departments?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 33) Do you ever need to block a customer for sales processing? If so, describe the
process in detail.
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 1) What types of vendors do you have? (domestic, foreign, payment address, etc.)
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you want vendor numbers assigned in the R/3 System? Name your criteria for
manual and automatic number assignment. Describe the format of manually assigned vendor
numbers.
A:
Q: 4) Do you have plants that supply materials or services to other plants in other company
codes?
A:
Q: 5) Do stock transport orders take place between stores or between the DC and store? If
so, for which sites?
A:
Q: 6) Do you want to reflect the organizational structure of your vendors in the R/3 System?
A:
Q: 7) Is it necessary for you to maintain different purchasing vendor master data for
different plants?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 8) When working with your suppliers, do you deal with people with different roles? If yes,
indicate the appropriate roles.
A:
A:
Q: 10) Are there any vendor-specific instructions or information that you want to include in
purchasing documents?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Do your vendors offer discounts for prompt payment (for example, 1% cash discount
within 10 days)? Provide a list of the payment terms you require.
A:
A:
Q: 13) Do you have vendors with several/different ordering addresses, payees, carriers,
and so on? If so, what do these depend on (assortment, supply region)?
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to maintain default data for the article master (such as planned delivery
time, purchasing group) at vendor level?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 15) Brazil only: Do you need a CGC/CPF check for vendors? If so, how do you want the
system to act (information message, warning, error message)?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Do you want to create the bank directory (address and control data for banks and post
office banks) manually or copy it automatically?
A:
Q: 2) Which banks and bank accounts will you be using for incoming and outgoing
payments?
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
1.11. Taxes
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you use an external Tax Package to determine the appropriate tax jurisdiction
and/or tax rates to apply to purchasing documents and/or vendor invoices? If yes, name the
external package.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you have products to be grouped into product groups for planning (for example,
due to similar procurement methods or because they are manufactured on the same
bottleneck machine)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) In medium to long-term planning do you use a rough-cut planning profile for resource
leveling?
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to define events in Sales and Operations Planning (SOP), so that their
influence on your planning is not derived from historical data?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Must you enter a specific BOM explosion, which is valid up to a set date, for a
material, in the case of a multiple BOMs for example?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Do you want to define flexible period lengths for Production Planning and Material
Requirements Planning (for lot size determination and evaluation purposes for example)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you maintain specific vendor quotas (for example 70 % from vendor A, 30% from
vendor B) for your materials? If yes, how many quota arrangements are you currently
maintaining?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you have various manufacturing processes for an assembly and do you want to
calculate the costs of the various manufacturing processes separately and compare them
with each other?
A:
3. Procurement
Questions:
A:
Q: 1) Will you maintain your vendor's part number within SAP, associated to your material
master number? If yes, could there be more than one manufacturers part number associated
with one of your material master numbers?
A:
3.2. Conditions
Questions:
Q: 1) Which price components do you use in purchasing documents (e.g. gross price,
surcharges, discounts, freight, duty, import)?
A:
Q: 2) Do prices depend on the quantity ordered (e.g. quantity discounts or price scales)? If
so, specify price components, quantity, and other factors.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) To which date does the price determination process relate? (E.g. delivery date, PO
date, other.)
A:
Q: 4) Is pricing information from other systems to be used for price computation purposes in
R/3?
A:
Q: 5) Do you manually change the price at header level for the entire purchasing
document?
A:
Q: 6) Do you allow changes to the gross price that is automatically determined by the R/3
System?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 9) Specifically for Brazil indexation: Which indexes and forms are necessary?
A:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to maintain a list of approved vendors? This means that if a material is
subject to a source list requirement, it can only be procured from the vendors included on the
source list.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you need a source list for: (1) all materials (2) all materials of a plant (3) certain
materials only? Please explain.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Is there a fixed vendor for some materials? (1) No. (1) Yes, in certain plants (specify)
(2) Yes, across the entire enterprise (3) Yes, everywhere except in certain plants (specify).
A:
Q: 5) Do some vendors cover certain geogr. regions? (1) No. (2) Yes. Warning if vendor
does not cover relevant region. (3) Yes. Prevent issue of POs in latter case.
o
Explanation: Are some of your suppliers specific to a geographic region? Are some of your
suppliers specific to a geographic region? Example : ACME Widgets supplies plants in the
western region; ABC Widgets supplies plants in the eastern region. A western plant should
not order widgets from an eastern region supplier. not order widgets from an eastern region
supplier. (1) Do not need this feature. (2) Want this feature, warning only if vendor does not
cover the plant's region. (3) Want this feature, preventing orders from vendors that do not
cover a plant's region. a plant's region. If you want to use this feature, indicate the region to
which each of your plants belong.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 1) Will you maintain specific vendor quotas (for example 70 % from vendor A, 30% from
vendor B) for your materials? If yes, how many quota arrangements are you currently
maintaining?
A:
Q: 1) Are there addresses, over and above the plant address(es) that will be used
repeatedly on purchasing documents? If yes, provide a list of those needed.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Do any storage locations have an address that varies from the assigned plant? If yes,
provide a list of the additional specific storage location addresses.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Do you grant your vendors volume rebates based on the volume of business done
over a period of time?
A:
Q: 1) Is the data from the process of subsequent settlement to be included in the profitability
analysis?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 4) Must external business volume data (e.g. from sites with other systems) be taken into
account for subsequent (end-of-period rebate) settlement?
A:
A:
Q: 6) Are your business partners to be given written notification of rebate arrangements for
which settlement accounting has taken place?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Listing of the various intervals used Listing of the various intervals used
A:
Explanation: For example, until cancelled or redefined annually. Note: You cannot map the
option "until cancellation" in the R/3 System by choosing "unending" rebate arrangement
(until 12.31.9999). See: Extending Rebate Arrangements Arrangements
A:
Q: 9) How many agreements do you use that have a validity period of more than one year?
A:
Q: 10) Which periods of time do you use that have a validity period of less than one year?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 15) In the case of multiple settlement, do you use fixed time intervals that can be defined
beforehand in a calendar?
Explanation: In the case of fixed predefined time intervals, partial settlement is possible -
otherwise only interim settlement. Urgent recommendation: work with partial settlement only.
Requirement Gathering Questions
Reason: interim settlement is not a data retention level. It is not subsequently possible to
determine which document items were settled in which settlement run.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 16) At which time intervals will you carry out partial settlement with regard to a rebate
agreement?
A:
Q: 17) If you perform several settlements for each rebate arrangement: Do you perform a
final settlement in which all previous payments on account are taken into consideration?
Explanation: The sum of the partial settlement payments may exceed the rebate achieved at
the end of the rebate arrangement validity period.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 18) Do you settle up with regard to rebate arrangements only within a self-contained
accounting unit ("company code"), or are different volume rebates also settled for different
sub-enterprises in a single rebate arrangement and allocated proportionately?
Explanation: At this point, you should not underestimate the volume of documents.
A:
A:
Q: 20) Are settlements that are sent to customers (instead of vendors) also created based
on the business volume data from purchasing or agency business?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 21) Before which settlements do you agree on your business volume with your
settlement partners?
Explanation: For example, only before final settlement for a rebate arrangement or also
before the settlements before that, for example, mid-year settlements
A:
Q: 22) Do you want to post the settlement documents immediately in Financial Accounting?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: You can set a posting block so that settlements must be released in a separate
step. separate step.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: Rebate based on business volume that is paid out at fixed intervals for defined
periods, for example. for example.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 24) Are subsequent settlement conditions to be taken into account for articles subject to
inventory management (valuation) on a value basis?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 27) Which schema do you want to use to calculate conditions that are subsequently
settled? Which discounts are included in the business volume basis for subsequent
settlement, if necessary?
A:
Q: 28) Which discounts are included in the business volume basis for subsequent
settlement, if necessary?
A:
Q: 29) On which value does the business volume of subsequent settlement depend?
Explanation: Net value in the invoice, gross value in the purchase order, and so on Net value
in the invoice, gross value in the purchase order, and so on
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 31) Do you want to transfer business volume data from other systems to the R/3
System?
Explanation: Several tools are available for transferring legacy data: - Per File - Per pro-
forma vendor billing document
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 32) Do you want to import documents subject to volume-based rebates into the system
using a data carrier?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: For example, business volume and revenue at material group or article type
level type level
A:
Q: 1) Will any purchasing documents be subject to approval in SAP? If yes, describe the
criteria that will be needed to determine the appropriate approval policy for purchase
requisitions, RFQs, purchase orders, contracts, scheduling agreements.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you rate the scores for these criteria? If the criteria are not weighted equally,
indicate the individual weightings.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
4. Production
4.1. Discrete Production
4.1.1. Production Version
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you require production versions that define materials, with which alternative BOMs
or with which task lists/master recipes
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you have different types of work centers and what are the differences between
them (e.g. labor work centers, machine work centers, production line)?
A:
Q: 2) To what other master data are your work centers linked (cost center etc.)?
A:
Q: 3) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you require
standard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)?
A:
Q: 4) Should default values be maintained in the work center, which can be transferred into
routings?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Does every work center have a standard capacity or do you maintain shift intervals?
A:
A:
4.1.2.2. Capacity
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Which capacity categories will you require (for example, labor, machine, process
unit)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you use pooled capacities (for example, energy, flexible labor groups)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you require in addition to the standard capacity a more precise capacity? If yes,
define your shifts and intervals.
A:
4.1.3. Routing
4.1.3.1. Routings
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you have different production methods for the same material (e.g. dependent on
the lot size)? Are there several routing alternatives for one material?
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to schedule the routings in order to determine the dates for all
operations?
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do you have operations for which you envisage external processing, that is that your
vendor will process?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you require
standard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) Will you require special user-defined fields in your routing for information and printing
purposes?
A:
Q: 11) Do you require standardized long texts for the operations (standard text keys)?
A:
Q: 12) What requirements are there regarding change management? How should the
validity be defined (based on date or freely definable parameters)? Will existing change
histories have to be transferred to the R/3 system?
A:
Q: 13) What requirements do you have regarding routing management (copy functions,
mass changes etc.)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Are sequences of operations used that remain constant, and which should be used as
templates (reference operation sets)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you maintain production resources/tools that are used during the processing of
your materials?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you require trigger points ( such as all subsequent processes to be released up
to final point , all immediate process to be released etc.)?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Will you use trigger points to generate rework orders/ standard operations ?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you want to calculate your standard values with given formulas and methods?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you require production versions that define materials, with which alternative BOMs
or with which task lists/master recipes
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) If you are working with period-based controlling, do you want to have one cost
collector for each production method or for each material?
A:
4.2.3. Planning ID
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to use the planning ID to group materials for planning and evaluation?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you have different production methods for the same material (e.g. dependent on
the lot size)? Are there several routing alternatives for one material?
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to schedule the routings in order to determine the dates for all
operations?
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do you have operations for which you envisage external processing, that is that your
vendor will process?
A:
Q: 7) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you require
standard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 10) Will you require special user-defined fields in your routing for information and printing
purposes?
A:
Q: 11) Do you require standardized long texts for the operations (standard text keys)?
A:
Q: 12) What requirements are there regarding change management? How should the
validity be defined (based on date or freely definable parameters)? Will existing change
histories have to be transferred to the R/3 system?
A:
Q: 13) What requirements do you have regarding routing management (copy functions,
mass changes etc.)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Are sequences of operations used that remain constant, and which should be used as
templates (reference operation sets)?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to represent the structure of a production line (line segment, processing
stations and so on) in a hierarchy?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you require production versions that define materials, with which alternative BOMs
or with which task lists/master recipes
A:
4.3.2. Resource
4.3.2.1. Resource
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you use different resource categories and what will be the differences between
them (for example, labor resources, storage resources, processing units)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you produce, for example, in a tank, and will you then store the finished product in
this tank until delivery (storage resources)?
A:
Q: 3) What functions shall be fulfilled by your resources? How will you use resources
(scheduling, capacity, costs, etc.)?
A:
Q: 4) Do you have resources that you will allocate to the process order on short notice
(classification, resource selection)?
A:
Q: 5) With which other objects will resources be linked (cost center, qualification, etc.)? Will
there be a link to the Human Resources Management system?
A:
Q: 6) Which standard values will you use (for example, labor time, machine time, setup
time)?
A:
Q: 7) Will special formulas be required for certain resources for scheduling, capacity
requirements planning, and cost determination?
A:
Q: 8) Do you want default values to be defined in the resource for the master recipe?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 9) Will each resource have a standard available capacity or do you want shift intervals to
be maintained?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Will there be restrictions regarding material flow through processing units that can be
visually reproduced using a sequence definition or a network?
A:
4.3.2.2. Capacity
Questions:
Q: 1) Which capacity categories will you require (for example, labor, machine, process
unit)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you use pooled capacities (for example, energy, flexible labor groups)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you require in addition to the standard capacity a more precise capacity? If yes,
define your shifts and intervals.
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Will you have several alternative recipes for one material (for example, depending on
the lot size) and do you want these to be combined (recipe group)?
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you use formulas to calculate the quantities of the components (material quantity
calculation)? Do you want characteristic values such as concentration to be taken into
account?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of changes? How do
you want the validity of the recipe to be defined?
A:
Q: 9) Will you require an approval procedure to change recipes? Will a digital signature be
required (change request/order)?
A:
Q: 10) Which relationships will exist between the phases within a recipe?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 14) Which standard values will you use for the operations (for example, labor time,
machine time, setup time)?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 18) Will special user fields be required in the master recipe for information and printing
purposes?
A:
Q: 19) Besides the actual processing unit, will further resources be allocated to an operation
(secondary resources) that are, for example, only used for a limited time (for example, labor,
transportation trucks)? Do you want them to be relevant for confirmation
A:
Q: 20) Which objects will be allocated to the phases (for example, components, production
resources/tools)?
A:
Q: 21) Will temporary materials (INTRA) with separate material numbers be produced
during the production process that will be processed further immediately instead of being
delivered to storage?
A:
Q: 22) Will you carry out in-process quality inspections, (assigning inspection characteristics
to phases)?
A:
Q: 23) Should the recording of inspection results be carried out in QM? Or should it be dealt
with in the PI-Sheet (either by a QM-Jump or by sending the information via the process
message)?
A:
Q: 24) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of master recipes
(copy function, mass changes, etc.)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you maintain production resources/tools that are used during the processing of
your materials?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 6) QM: List any external equipment or gauges which will be used to capture results or
defects and transfer to the R/3 System.
A:
4.4. KANBAN
4.4.1. Supply Area
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) If you use KANBAN, you must determine the relationship between the demand and
supply source. Define your control cycles!
A:
A:
Q: 3) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for in-house production?
A:
Q: 4) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for external procurement?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 5) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for stock transfer?
A:
Q: 6) Do you want to use the automatic kanban calculation to ensure optimal settings,
regular checks and adjustments to the control variables (number of kanbans and material
quantity per kanban)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to group sales to customers into various levels for reporting purposes?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterprise
and allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structures
within your customers' enterprises?
A:
5.2. Products
5.2.1. Material determination
Questions:
Q: 1) If you use special packaging for different occasions, such as, Thanksgiving), do you
want the system to automatically substitute the special packaging when the product is
ordered?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) If yes, how does substitution take place, that is on which master data fields do you
base your substitution?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Why would you substitute one product for another or one packaging for another?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want product substitution to occur only when the original ordered product is
not available?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Do you want the substituted product to be listed as a sub-item of the originally ordered
product, or should the substituted product completely replace the original product?
A:
Q: 6) Do you want to print product information for the original or the substitute product in the
output?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you use a process to simplify order entry for customers that regularly order the
same product or group of products?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you need automatic product proposal specific to your customer during sales order
processing?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) During your telesales activities, do you want to inform customers about additional
products to the one they are ordering (for example, accessories)?
A:
A:
A:
5.2.5. Material Listing /Material Exclusion
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you offer specific materials to certain customers (material listing)? If yes, describe
this process in detail.
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you exclude customers from ordering certain products (material exclusion)? If yes,
describe the process in detail.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How do you determine which materials are permitted for value contracts (standard
material, product hierarchy, assortment)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you limit the quantity of an item that you sell to a customer (product allocation)?
A:
A:
5.3. Assortment
5.3.1. Assortment Module Maintenance
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Explanation: It is only good business practice to define customer assortments if you are a
wholesaler.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: It is only good business practice to define customer assortments if you are a
wholesaler. are a wholesaler.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
5.4. Agreements
5.4.1. Customer material information
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) What type of rebates do you offer (for example, volume, quantity, lump sum)?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you group marketing deals into marketing plans? If yes, please describe in detail.
A:
A:
Q: 3) Are these deals customer specific or are they related to the product?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
5.5. Conditions
Questions:
Q: 1) Which general methods of price determination do you use (e.g. list price with
discounts, surcharges)?
A:
Q: 2) Which price types do you use, what are your criteria, and how do you compute them?
A:
Q: 3) Do you work with surcharges? If so, which types of surcharge and criteria do you use
and how is the calculation carried out?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Do work with discounts? If so, what kind of discounts and criteria do you use and how
is the calculation carried out?
A:
Q: 5) Which prices, surcharges, discounts, and freight costs apply to the whole document
and which apply to the item level only?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 7) Do work with freight costs? If so, what kinds of freight costs and criteria do you use
and how is the calculation carried out?
A:
Q: 8) Do you work with taxes? If so, which types of tax and criteria do you use and how is
the calculation carried out?
A:
Q: 9) Do work with discounts in kind? If so, what kinds of discount in kind do you use?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Must the R/3 System access information stored in another system (external or
internal) in order to calculate a price?
A:
Q: 12) Does the same pricing structure apply to all order types?
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you work with commissions (e.g. for sales personnel, carriers/forwarders)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 15) Which pricing information do you record for statistical purposes (without changing
the price)? For example, material costs, profit margins, or sub-totals printed on invoices.
A:
A:
Q: 17) If you process orders using EDI, do you accept the expected order price per item or
the expected order value?
A:
Q: 18) If you process cross-company orders, do you calculate these based on a specified
amount or on a percentage of the price per piece?
A:
A:
Q: 20) Is the system to cumulate the amounts for certain conditions (e.g.discounts) and de-
activate the discount once a specified maximum value has been reached (tracking cumulative
values)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 21) Do you have multiple prices and discounts for a customer and require the system to
search the combination of all eligible prices and discounts and give the customer the "best" or
"lowest" price?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 23) Do you need to determine prices based on the variant configuration results? For
example, when selling an automobile, options for number of doors, color, engine size, and
music system help determine the price to be charged.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 25) Do you carry out a price determination process for projects with make-to-order
production?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 28) How are the pricing conditions specified (e.g. quantity, percentage, scales, fixed
values)?
A:
Q: 29) Which reports and analyses do you need for price determination purposes?
A:
Q: 30) What criteria should be maintained for conditions (country, customer group, and so
on)?
A:
Q: 31) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterprise
and allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structures
within your customers' enterprises?
A:
Q: 32) Do you base the price of an item on the production cost or the cost of purchase of
the material?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
5.6. Output
Questions:
Q: 1) What master data fields do you use to determine what output to send?
A:
Q: 2) What type of output do you send (e.g. Paper, Fax, EDI, Internet)?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
5.7. Transport
5.7.1. Routes/Stages
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you plan weekly customer deliveries from a shipping point to different goods
recipients and their unloading points in a route (route schedule)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 1) Are your hazardous materials administered at just one or several storage locations?
A:
6.2. Batch
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) General: Do you want to copy the batch numbers from your vendors into the SAP
System? Do you want this to be entered using a batch master record or a characteristic
(classification)?
A:
A:
Q: 5) Batch level: Do your batches have to be unique at a plant level, cross-plant at material
level or customer level?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 6) Batch level: Do you want some materials to be handled in batches in some plants and
not in others?
A:
Q: 7) Batch level: Do you transfer batches among different plants? Do you want the
transferred batch to be known in the receiving plant? (plant level or cross-plant level)
A:
Q: 8) Batch level: If it is cross-plant, is it possible that you must assign the same batch
number to different materials? (material level or customer level)
A:
A:
Q: 10) Batch number: Do want to automatically create batches for goods movement or for
the material you want to produce in the order?
A:
Q: 11) Batch number: Do you want to explain how your batch numbers are set up?
A:
Q: 12) Batch status management: Do you want to represent the usability of a batch using
batch status management?
A:
Q: 13) Batch status management: In what way are batches released and who is responsible
for their release?
A:
Q: 14) Batch status management: Do you have to manage the status of a batch as a cross-
storage location or a cross-stock type?
A:
Q: 15) Batch specifications: Do you want to describe the technical, physical and/or chemical
properties of a batch using characteristics and characteristic values?
A:
Q: 16) Batch specifications: Can you group certain materials based on a common
specification to classes?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 17) Batch specifications: When do you assign values to characteristics? Where does the
information for the value assignment come from? (for example, from the result summary in
QM)
A:
Q: 18) Batch determination: Do you need batch determination in order to find goods
movements from a warehouse that have a certain specification? In which areas (inventory ma
nagement, production, sales and distribution) do you use batch determination?
A:
Q: 19) Batch determination: What criteria do you want to use to find and sort the batches?
(batch-find strategy)
A:
Q: 20) Batch determination: Define a batch-find strategy in order to set which conditions
(criteria) you want to use to find batches.
A:
Q: 21) Batch determination: For performance reasons, it is recommended that some SAP
standard characteristics, such as deletion indicator or batch status, are included in th e
selection class,
A:
Q: 22) Batch where-used list: Do you want to document the path of a batch through the
enterprise using a batch where-used list? (for liability reasons)
A:
Q: 23) Active ingredient management: Do you want to manage materials with active
ingredients that are to be handled with batches?
A:
Q: 24) Active ingredient management: Do you have materials that have the amount of
active ingredients or fixed components managed in percent (%)?
A:
Q: 25) Active ingredient management: Do you have material that must be managed using
two different measuring units, such as ounces and grams? Is the relationship between them a
percent or can it be defined freely?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 26) Active ingredient management: Is the price based on the amount of ingredients? Do
you order raw materials in ingredient units of measure?
A:
Q: 27) Active ingredient management: Do you want to carry out a batch determination
based on ingredient amounts?
A:
Q: 28) Do you want to manage and track materials by batch? If yes, specify the materials
or groups of material.
A:
Q: 29) Do you want to manage and track materials by expiration date? If yes, specify the
materials or groups of material, also specify if you wish to see the total shelf life of the
material, or the remining shelf life.
A:
Q: 30) Do you have any materials where you keep track of the amount of active ingredients;
or percent solids?
A:
A:
Q: 2) Define the characteristics that are important when searching for a batch of a material,
such as color, weight, expiration date (selection class).
A:
Q: 3) When selecting material from batches that have met the criteria in the previous
question, what rules do you follow (FIFO or LIFO, quality, other)?
A:
Q: 4) When searching for a batch, what key information do you use (strategy type)?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 7) Does the material for a sales order have to be taken from only one batch, or are batch
splits allowed?
A:
Q: 1) If you use KANBAN, you must determine the relationship between the demand and
supply source. Define your control cycles!
A:
A:
Q: 3) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for in-house production?
A:
Q: 4) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for external procurement?
A:
Q: 5) Which replenishment strategies would you like to use for stock transfer?
A:
Q: 6) Do you want to use the automatic kanban calculation to ensure optimal settings,
regular checks and adjustments to the control variables (number of kanbans and material
quantity per kanban)?
A:
Q: 1) Are there serialized objects in your company? If so, which objects do you want to
serialize?
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to manage further information using serial numbers (for example, serial
numbers for equipment in maintenance or service) in addition to inventory management
information?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: is there a serial number to identify each
piece of equipment (from your production department and/or from the manufacturer)?
A:
Q: 5) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: If there are serial numbers, on which level
do you want to track history (include costing, statistics, and so on)?
A:
Q: 6) Plant Maintenance and Customer Service: do you want to create your own serial
numbers, or do you use the manufacturer's serial number as a reference/key for that object?
A:
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
Q: 8) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
7. Customer Service
7.1. Business Partner
7.1.1. Customer Hierarchy
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to group sales to customers into various levels for reporting purposes?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
7.2.2. Conditions
Questions:
Q: 1) Which general methods of price determination do you use (e.g. list price with
discounts, surcharges)?
A:
Q: 2) Which price types do you use, what are your criteria, and how do you compute them?
A:
Q: 3) Do you work with surcharges? If so, which types of surcharge and criteria do you use
and how is the calculation carried out?
A:
Q: 4) Do work with discounts? If so, what kind of discounts and criteria do you use and how
is the calculation carried out?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 5) Which prices, surcharges, discounts, and freight costs apply to the whole document
and which apply to the item level only?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 7) Do work with freight costs? If so, what kinds of freight costs and criteria do you use
and how is the calculation carried out?
A:
Q: 8) Do you work with taxes? If so, which types of tax and criteria do you use and how is
the calculation carried out?
A:
Q: 9) Do work with discounts in kind? If so, what kinds of discount in kind do you use?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Must the R/3 System access information stored in another system (external or
internal) in order to calculate a price?
A:
Q: 12) Does the same pricing structure apply to all order types?
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you work with commissions (e.g. for sales personnel, carriers/forwarders)?
A:
Q: 15) Which pricing information do you record for statistical purposes (without changing
the price)? For example, material costs, profit margins, or sub-totals printed on invoices.
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 17) If you process orders using EDI, do you accept the expected order price per item or
the expected order value?
A:
Q: 18) If you process cross-company orders, do you calculate these based on a specified
amount or on a percentage of the price per piece?
A:
A:
Q: 20) Is the system to cumulate the amounts for certain conditions (e.g.discounts) and de-
activate the discount once a specified maximum value has been reached (tracking cumulative
values)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 21) Do you have multiple prices and discounts for a customer and require the system to
search the combination of all eligible prices and discounts and give the customer the "best" or
"lowest" price?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 23) Do you need to determine prices based on the variant configuration results? For
example, when selling an automobile, options for number of doors, color, engine size, and
music system help determine the price to be charged.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 25) Do you carry out a price determination process for projects with make-to-order
production?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 28) How are the pricing conditions specified (e.g. quantity, percentage, scales, fixed
values)?
A:
Q: 29) Which reports and analyses do you need for price determination purposes?
A:
Q: 30) What criteria should be maintained for conditions (country, customer group, and so
on)?
A:
Q: 31) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterprise
and allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structures
within your customers' enterprises?
A:
Q: 32) Do you base the price of an item on the production cost or the cost of purchase of
the material?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
7.3. Products
7.3.1. Material Master: Service Product
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) What is the default sales unit in sales processing and what are alternative sales
units?
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you group similar products together (for example, in divisions or material groups)?
A:
Q: 6) Do you maintain additional statuses for your materials (such as sales status)?
A:
Q: 7) If you have multiple plants, is your material normally supplied by a specific plant?
A:
A:
Q: 9) Do you record a minimum delivery quantity on your materials? If so, what happens
during sales order processing if a violation occurs?
A:
Q: 10) Are there materials that must be shipped in certain multiples (delivery units)?
A:
Q: 11) Can a material have different values in one plant? What are the criteria for the
different values?
A:
Q: 12) Do you use other systems (such as service management or costing) that need
material master records from R/3 and therefore a permanent interface?
A:
Q: 13) Describe the structure and numbering system for material numbers
(internal/external, specific to material type, other criteria).
A:
Q: 14) Which material types do you use (please complete): FERT, HALB, ROH, KMAT,
HAWA, FMHI, ...?
A:
Q: 15) Do you maintain multilingual descriptions for materials? Which languages are
relevant? How and when are they translated?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 17) Please describe the process for creating and adding to material data. Include release
procedure/status, important sequences, automatic notifications (workflow), responsibilities,
authorizations, involved systems, and so on.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 20) Do you need to customize the appearance of or add data fields to the material
master record (additional fields, customized material master, field selection, customer-specific
field checks)?
A:
Q: 21) Do you use classification for your material masters? For what reasons (storing
addition information, search functionality, or variant configuration)?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) How is information about technical objects organized and stored in your company (for
example, via EDV, file cards or no information at all)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you usually have several technical objects for a customer that you want to
represent together? Do you require additional functionality to structure this accordingly?
A:
Q: 2) If yes, which technical objects from customer sites should be combined using
functional locations?
A:
Q: 3) What do the hierarchy levels of the functional locations represent (for example, cost
center levels, production process levels)?
A:
A:
Q: 5) How detailed should the functional location hierarchy be (for example, number of
levels, installation and dismantling of equipment)?
A:
A:
Q: 7) How detailed should the last level of the hierarchy for functional locations be?
A:
Q: 8) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change (for
example, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)?
A:
Q: 9) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a) from
a procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)?
A:
Q: 10) How should the different levels be linked together with regard to the transfer of data?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring
points and counters?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
Q: 15) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that
are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.
A:
Q: 17) Do you want to analyze what influence the usage conditions have on the
susceptibility to damage of the installed equipment?
Explanation: For example, if there is a connection between breakdown frequency and usage
site. If yes, you should work with functional locations.
A:
Q: 18) Do you need to document your technical objects according to their usage time for
functional locations?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 19) Do you determine the business partners (internal and/or external) whose
address(es) you require, if you need maintenance requests for a particular functional
location?
A:
Q: 20) Do you want to archive master records for functional locations? If yes, provide a
copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving
requirements.
A:
Q: 21) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects
(functional location, equipment) user-specific?
A:
7.4.2. Equipment
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you identify these for information only in unchecked system numbers and/or using
master records, such as serial number records or equipment master records?
A:
A:
Q: 4) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.
A:
Q: 5) How many pieces of customer equipment do you expect to manage in your system?
A:
A:
Q: 7) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of the
manufacturer as a reference/key for that object?
A:
Q: 8) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (including
costing, statistics, and so on)?
A:
Q: 9) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handle
individually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them.
A:
Q: 10) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records in
conjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods
movements)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,
in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?
A:
Q: 12) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address
when you need service requests for a particular piece of equipment.
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipment
master records? If yes, give some examples.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 15) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and
counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 16) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
Q: 17) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether these
should be recorded individually for each piece of equipment.
A:
Q: 18) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
Q: 19) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting
work on specific equipment?
A:
Q: 20) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories or
information about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example.
A:
Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that
are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.
A:
Q: 22) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?
A:
Q: 23) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects
(functional location, equipment) user-specific?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 24) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of your
document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving
requirements.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.
A:
Q: 3) How many pieces of customer equipment do you expect to manage in your system?
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of the
manufacturer as a reference/key for that object?
A:
Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (including
costing, statistics, and so on)?
A:
Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handle
individually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them.
A:
Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records in
conjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods
movements)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,
in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address
when you need service requests for a particular piece of equipment.
A:
A:
Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipment
master records? If yes, give some examples.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and
counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.
A:
Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether these
should be recorded individually for each piece of equipment.
A:
Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting
work on specific equipment?
A:
Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories or
information about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that
are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.
A:
Q: 20) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?
A:
Q: 21) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects
(functional location, equipment) user-specific?
A:
Q: 22) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of your
document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving
requirements.
A:
A:
Q: 24) Which data do you want to see/maintain within the fleet object?
Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects. A customer exit exists for user-
defined master data (business add-in).
A:
Explanation: For example, fuel or oil. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this
field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run
reports as a search help.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 26) For what purpose do you intend to use your fleet objects?
Explanation: The definition of intended purpose uses a possible classification of fleet objects
for the search. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, it
need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help.
A:
Q: 27) Which engine types do your fleet objects have? Do you want to maintain these?
Explanation: For example: Diesel engine, turbines and so on. Note: For 4.6B, there are no
additional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration,
but can be used to run reports as a search help.
A:
Explanation: Steps for defining the units of consumption: 1. Define consumption categories
(for example, energy consumption over distance or over time) 2. Create corresponding units
(for example, liters/kilometer, gallons/mile, watts/hour and so on)
A:
Q: 29) Which counter types do you require (for example, kilometer counter, consumption
counter, time counter and so on)?
A:
A:
Explanation: - Which counters are used as a basis? - What unit should be used? - What is
the consumption category (for example, consumption/activity or activity/consumption ->
inversion flag)? - How long should the calculation last?
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) Will you need to use engineering change management to control BOM changes?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) If yes, are they pieces of equipment that you want to trace on monitor?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) If you use equipment hierarchies, describe some examples of when and how they are
structured.
A:
Q: 4) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,
in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 9) Will you need to use Engineering Change Management to manage your BOMs?
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to use IBase management (a) purely for documentation and
management of an object structure (i.e. a production process) or (b) as a limited substitute for
bills of material?
Explanation: For (a): For information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (a): For
information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (b): The decisive advantage of
installed base management as against bills of material is that it is multi-levelled and time-
based. The structure of an installed base hierarchy is possible with individualization without
using equipment - for example, using serial numbers (complete equipment), or without
equipment (with only device data). However, when building an alternative structure for the
equipment hierarchy, an inheritance is not possible, neither is setting a status. a status. It is
possible to install an installed base structure in the form of a subscreen in the screen
templates for a notification or a technical object using the corresponding Customizing tables.
object using the corresponding Customizing tables.
A:
A:
7.4.7. Reference Functional Location
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you have many similar objects to reproduce the technical structures of your
customers site?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Do you have work plans for service tasks in your current IT system or databases?
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to archive maintenance task lists? If so, please provide a copy of your
document archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specific
archiving requirements.
A:
Questions:
A:
Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that
are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.
A:
A:
Q: 1) Will you offer a preventive maintenance service to your customers? If so, please
describe in detail the different types of preventive maintenance offered.
A:
Q: 2) How will you create maintenance plans (e.g., representing individual maintenance
items or by grouping a number of maintenance items)?
A:
Q: 3) Will you plan the preventive maintenance separatly for each maintenance equipment
or will you establish a preventive maintenance plan for a group of maintenance objects (e.g.,
one plan for a production line that consists of several pieces of equipment)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Do you have different frequencies for the execution of your maintenance tasks and
would you like to have all of them in just one maintenance plan?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Will you have pre-defined activity lists (task lists) for your different preventive
maintenance services that list the required work steps (including estimated work time), spare
parts and/or tools?
A:
Q: 8) If yes, are those activity lists specific for the different equipment types (machine types)
or different functional locations for which you offer preventive maintenance?
A:
Q: 9) Do you want to archive maintenance plans? If so, please provide a copy of your
document archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specific
archiving requirements.
A:
7.6.1. Warranty
Questions:
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Describe the different warranties for your objects and specify whether these should be
listed individually for each object.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you presently separate your standard contracts by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Is the customer project contract similar to the customer project quotation? (If yes,
consider creating with reference to the quotation. If no, consider creating a new project.)
A:
Q: 5) What are the reference numbers on the customer purchase order (PO) that relate to a
project quotation? (You can enter them in the fields for additional data in the sales contract.)
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 6) On which level do you monitor and control project-related revenues? (Consider the
implications for selection of billing elements in the whole WBS.)
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you need automatic billing blocks released by the project? (If yes, consider using
project milestones to release the block.)
A:
Q: 9) Do you need to define fixed dates that act as project milestones in the sales contract?
A:
Q: 10) Do you need to evaluate your projects based on multiple characteristics (for example
by product line, project type, geographic location)? (If yes, consider using Profitability
Analysis (PA) and settling your projects to PA.)
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a
contract? If so, then for what reasons?
A:
Q: 14) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, delivery
times, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
Q: 15) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?
A:
Q: 16) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the same
contract?
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 20) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 22) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? If
so, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?
A:
Q: 23) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do you
use this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),
service management)?
A:
Q: 24) Do you have long-term service agreements with your customers (for example to
perform preventive maintenance on your customer equipment periodically)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 25) If so, please describe the different types of service contracts that you offer to your
customer (for example differentiation by validity period or type of service).
A:
Q: 26) Can your customer choose between different contract options (for example, 24h
versus 12h response times)? List all options available for the different contract types.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 27) Will the contract options selected by the customer influence the pricing of the service
contract? If so, please describe the criteria influencing the price.
A:
Q: 28) Do you have contract-specific price agreements with your customers, and if so, what
do they look like (for example, the service contract with the customer covers all the spare
parts that are used during a service under the contract)?
A:
Q: 29) What technical objects are covered by the service contract item. Do you use one
service contract per piece of equipment, or does one service contract includes all the
customer's equipment?
A:
Q: 30) Do you want to assign maintenance plans to your customer maintenance contracts?
A:
Q: 31) Do you use resource-related billing for contracts? Describe when you would use this
functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting), service
management).
A:
Q: 32) Do you offer master contracts to which other contracts are linked?
A:
Q: 33) What types of text do you require on your service contracts? Are they required on
output?
A:
Q: 34) What information in a service contract do you consider obligatory and would like to
appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the document
as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 35) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a service contract? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the single cycle maintenance
plan?
A:
A:
7.6.4. Multiple Counter Plan
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you use cycle sets for the attachment of multiple counter plans?
A:
Q: 3) Which counters for which technical objects (functional locations, equipment) should be
assigned to the individual maintenance cycles?
A:
Q: 4) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) List the different service cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenance
activities should be based. For example, an inspection is performed every 6 months, but not
within the first year.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 8) Do you want to plan the maintenance service for your customers independently of
your hierarchy of technical objects?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the strategy-based maintenance
plan?
A:
Q: 2) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) List the different service cycles, on which the scheduling of preventive maintenance
activities should be based. For example, an inspection is performed every 6 months, but not
within the first year.
A:
Q: 6) Do you want to plan the maintenance service for your customers independently of
your hierarchy of technical objects?
A:
A:
Q: 1) Do you sell products for which detailed technical information is required in order to
introduce necessary error handling?
Explanation: Creation of a solution database with information on errors which have occurred
(symptoms) and possible solutions.
A:
Explanation: For example, in the case of the employee responsible being insufficiently
qualified or very complex technical facts.
A:
Q: 3) Do recurring problems constantly appear during notification processing that are linked
with a complex solution process?
A:
A:
Q: 5) Is error diagnosis an essential step in your area or is it "only" used for short-term error
handling?
A:
Q: 6) Are you already using (computer-supported) Help for error analysis and handling
based on a knowledge or error database?
A:
7.7.1. Symptom
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring points
and counters?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and
counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.
A:
7.8.2. Catalog
Questions:
A:
A:
7.8.3. Permit
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard to
working conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.
A:
A:
8. Plant Maintenance
8.1. Technical Objects (Structuring of Technical Systems)
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) What kinds of technical objects do you handle (for example, objects that can be
dismantled or used for different purposes in different production stages etc.)?
A:
Q: 3) How is information about technical objects organized and stored in your company (for
example, via EDV, file cards or no information at all)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you manage objects that are immovable and that usually have a long operational
life (for example, clarification plants)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 4) What do the hierarchy levels of the functional locations represent (for example, cost
center levels, production process levels)?
A:
A:
Q: 6) How detailed should the functional location hierarchy be (for example, number of
levels, installation and dismantling of equipment)?
A:
A:
Q: 8) How detailed should the last level of the hierarchy for functional locations be?
A:
Q: 9) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change (for
example, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)?
A:
Q: 10) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a)
from a procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)?
A:
Q: 11) How should the different levels be linked together with regard to the transfer of data?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring
points and counters?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 15) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that
are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.
A:
Q: 18) Do you want to analyze what influence the usage conditions have on the
susceptibility to damage of the installed equipment?
Explanation: For example, if there is a connection between breakdown frequency and usage
site. If yes, you should work with functional locations.
A:
Q: 19) Do you need to document your technical objects according to their usage time for
functional locations?
A:
Q: 20) Do you determine the business partners (internal and/or external) whose
address(es) you require, if you need maintenance requests for a particular functional
location?
A:
Q: 21) Do you want to archive master records for functional locations? If yes, provide a
copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving
requirements.
A:
Q: 22) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects
(functional location, equipment) user-specific?
A:
8.1.2. Equipment
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of the
manufacturer as a reference/key for that object?
A:
Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (including
costing, statistics, and so on)?
A:
Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handle
individually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them.
A:
Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records in
conjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods
movements)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,
in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?
A:
Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address
when you need maintenance requests for a particular piece of equipment.
A:
A:
Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipment
master records? If yes, give some examples.
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and
counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.
A:
Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether these
should be recorded individually for each piece of equipment.
A:
Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting
work on specific equipment?
A:
Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories or
information about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example.
A:
Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that
are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 21) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 22) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects
(functional location, equipment) user-specific?
A:
A:
Q: 24) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of your
document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving
requirements.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of the
manufacturer as a reference/key for that object?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (including
costing, statistics, and so on)?
A:
Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handle
individually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them.
A:
Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records in
conjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods
movements)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,
in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?
A:
Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address
when you need maintenance requests for a particular piece of equipment.
A:
A:
Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipment
master records? If yes, give some examples.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and
counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.
A:
Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
Requirement Gathering Questions
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether these
should be recorded individually for each piece of equipment.
A:
Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting
work on specific equipment?
A:
Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories or
information about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example.
A:
Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that
are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.
A:
Q: 20) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?
A:
Q: 21) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects
(functional location, equipment) user-specific?
A:
Q: 22) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of your
document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving
requirements.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 24) Which data do you want to see/maintain within the fleet object?
Explanation: IMG: Set screen templates for technical objects. A customer exit exists for user-
defined master data (business add-in).
A:
Explanation: For example, fuel or oil. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this
field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run
reports as a search help.
A:
Q: 26) For what purpose do you intend to use your fleet objects?
Explanation: The definition of intended purpose uses a possible classification of fleet objects
for the search. Note: For 4.6B, there are no additional functions for this field. Therefore, it
need not be considered during configuration, but can be used to run reports as a search help.
A:
Q: 27) Which engine types do your fleet objects have? Do you want to maintain these?
Explanation: For example: Diesel engine, turbines and so on. Note: For 4.6B, there are no
additional functions for this field. Therefore, it need not be considered during configuration,
but can be used to run reports as a search help.
A:
Explanation: Steps for defining the units of consumption: 1. Define consumption categories
(for example, energy consumption over distance or over time) 2. Create corresponding units
(for example, liters/kilometer, gallons/mile, watts/hour and so on)
A:
Q: 29) Which counter types do you require (for example, kilometer counter, consumption
counter, time counter and so on)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Explanation: - Which counters are used as a basis? - What unit should be used? - What is
the consumption category (for example, consumption/activity or activity/consumption ->
inversion flag)? - How long should the calculation last?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects (functional
location, equipment) user-specific?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 3) Will you need to use engineering change management to control BOM changes?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) If yes, are they pieces of equipment that you want to trace on monitor?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) If you use equipment hierarchies, describe some examples of when and how they are
structured.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 4) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,
in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 9) Will you need to use Engineering Change Management to manage your BOMs?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) If so, for which of the following objects do you want to display the links?
A:
Q: 3) Which types of relationship exist between the linked objects (1:1, 1:n, n:n)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to use IBase management (a) purely for documentation and
management of an object structure (i.e. a production process) or (b) as a limited substitute for
bills of material?
Explanation: For (a): For information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (a): For
information and/or liability purposes for your customer. For (b): The decisive advantage of
installed base management as against bills of material is that it is multi-levelled and time-
based. The structure of an installed base hierarchy is possible with individualization without
using equipment - for example, using serial numbers (complete equipment), or without
equipment (with only device data). However, when building an alternative structure for the
equipment hierarchy, an inheritance is not possible, neither is setting a status. a status. It is
possible to install an installed base structure in the form of a subscreen in the screen
templates for a notification or a technical object using the corresponding Customizing tables.
object using the corresponding Customizing tables.
A:
A:
Q: 1) Do you have work plans for service tasks in your current IT system or databases?
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to archive maintenance task lists? If so, please provide a copy of your
document archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specific
archiving requirements.
A:
Questions:
A:
Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that
are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 1) How will you create maintenance plans (e.g., representing individual maintenance
items or by grouping a number of maintenance items)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you plan the preventive maintenance separately for each maintenance equipment
or will you establish a preventive maintenance plan for a group of maintenance objects (e.g.,
one plan for a productionline that consists of several pieces of equipment)?
A:
Q: 3) Do you have different frequencies for the execution of your maintenance tasks and
would you like to have all of them in just one maintenance plan?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 6) Will you have pre-defined activity lists (task lists) for your different preventive
maintenance services that list the required work steps (including estimated work time), spare
parts and/or tools?
A:
Q: 7) If yes, are those activity lists specific for the different equipment types (machine types)
or different functional locations for which you offer preventive maintenance?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 8) Do you want to archive maintenance plans? If so, please provide a copy of your
document archiving policy if available. If this is not available, please describe specific
archiving requirements.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the single cycle maintenance
plan?
A:
A:
8.3.2. Multiple Counter Plan
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you use cycle sets for the attachment of multiple counter plans?
A:
Q: 3) Which counters for which technical objects (functional locations, equipment) should be
assigned to the individual maintenance cycles?
A:
Q: 4) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within the
first year.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the strategy-based maintenance
plan?
A:
Q: 2) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?
A:
A:
A:
Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within the
first year.
A:
A:
Q: 1) Do you possess technical objects that are required for detailed technical information in
order to introduce necessary error handling?
Explanation: Creation of a solution database with information on errors which have occurred
(symptoms) and proposed solutions.
A:
Explanation: For example, in the case of the employee responsible being insufficiently
qualified or very complex technical facts.
A:
Q: 3) Do recurring problems constantly appear during notification processing that are linked
with a complex solution process?
A:
A:
Q: 5) Is error diagnosis an essential step in your area or is it "only" used for short-term error
handling?
A:
Q: 6) Are you already using (computer-supported) Help for error analysis and handling
based on a knowledge or error database?
A:
8.4.1. Symptom
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Describe the different warranties for your objects and specify whether these should be
listed individually for each object.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring points
and counters?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and
counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.
A:
8.5.3. Revision
Questions:
Q: 1) Is there any revision planned where a production line or plant has to be shut down for
a certain time?
A:
8.5.4. Catalog
Questions:
A:
A:
8.5.5. Permit
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard to
working conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.
A:
A:
9. Quality Management
9.1. QM General
9.1.1. Inspection Plan
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you maintain instructions and descriptions for the material inspection? Give an
example for an inspection plan that you currently use and explain which critical data it
contains.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) Are the inspection activities currently maintained in an online format and are the
detailed descriptions critical to the inspection process?
A:
Q: 3) Will you have more than one operation in the inspection process?
Explanation: Example: Operation 10: Visual inspection of packaging Operation 20: Record
results of laboratory analysis Describe the individual operations. (Note: Otherwise, a material
specification may be sufficient for inspection processing in certain circumstances).
A:
Q: 4) Do you have valid inspection descriptions and operations for each individual material
or for all materials? Describe them.
A:
Q: 5) Provide a copy of your document archiving method if available. If this is not available,
describe your specific archiving requirements.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Note: For more information see "Work Center" under "General Master Data".
A:
Q: 2) Do you have multiple inspection locations (work centers) per plant? Describe these
locations, and identify how they are different.
A:
A:
Q: 4) Will approval procedures comply to the work center or operation? Describe this in
detail.
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Provide a copy of your document archiving method if available. If this is not available,
describe your specific archiving requirements.
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Explanation: Examples: Shoe or clothing sizes. The appropriate sizes are entered in the
sales order, depending on which country the customer is in.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Will you use material specifications as inspection criteria for your material?
A:
Q: 3) Will you transfer inspection data to the batch? If yes, to which characteristics does this
apply?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you maintain instructions for the inspection of characteristics? How are these
currently stored?
A:
Q: 2) Provide a copy of your document archiving method if available. If this is not available,
describe your specific archiving requirements.
A:
9.1.7. Catalog
Questions:
Q: 1) Note: For questions about the catalog, see QM processes for results and defects
recording and usage decisions
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Which codes do you use for the usage decision? Are they specific to every inspection
type?
A:
Q: 3) Which follow-up actions should be automatically performed after the usage decision is
made?
A:
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Which procedure is to be used to valuate the results in the inspection lot (for
example, according to the number of nonconforming units in a lot?).
A:
Explanation: This means that 'n' elements are to be taken from the delivery, for example,
based on the goods receipt quantity (with or without AQL authorization).
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How are the sample quantities to be calculated and what criteria are to be used?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you define the inspection scope based on quality (this means for example, will
you check processes with a consistently low quality more regularly than those processes,
which constantly improve in quality)? Describe the procedure.
A:
Q: 2) Will you vary the sample size between a defined scope (for example, 100%) and a
skip (that is, a certain number of deliveries or inspection lots have not been inspected).
Describe which rotation intervals you use?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Which physical-sample types (for example, primary samples, pooled samples, and
reserve samples) will you draw?
A:
Q: 3) Which physical-sample types will you process? (for example, sample from production,
competitor)
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you maintain production resources/tools that are used during the processing of
your materials?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 6) QM: List any external equipment or gauges which will be used to capture results or
defects and transfer to the R/3 System.
A:
9.1.14. QM Order
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to record quality costs for quality inspections? If yes, do you want to
evaluate the costs collectively or for each inspection lot?
A:
A:
Q: 4) How will you evaluate quality costs? Do you want to evaluate your inspection costs at
goods receipt or based on the material level?
Explanation: Note: Order assignment in the material master for the inspection type.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 5) Which activities (for example, personel time, setup times etc) do you want to confirm
for your QM order?
A:
Explanation: Reconciliation in CO of the time periods, in which orders are to be settled (for
example, monthly, quarterly, annually).
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to archive master inspection characteristics? If so, provide a copy of your
procedure for archiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archiving
requirements in detail.
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to archive inspection methods? If so, provide a copy of your procedure
for archiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archiving requirements
in detail.
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to archive inspection plans? If so, provide a copy of your procedure for
archiving documents (if you have one) or describe your individual archiving requirements in
detail.
A:
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Will you require samples from your suppliers for release before shipping the goods?
Describe them.
A:
Explanation: How and where is your list of approved vendors managed? Are all buyers
authorized to select and approve a vendor?
A:
Q: 4) Will you allow conditional approvals for new vendors (for example, quantity-related or
time-related limitation)?
A:
Q: 5) Will you monitor your vendors' quality management system (for example, ISO 9000
conformity)? Give examples of how and where you manage this data at the moment.
A:
Q: 6) Describe how you block a vendor and the reasons for the block.
A:
Q: 7) Do you not want to have any inspections for some vendor/material combinations?
A:
Q: 8) Do you want source inspections instead of goods receipt inspections for certain
material/vendor combinations?
A:
Q: 9) Do you use quality assurance agreements that are specific to a material or vendor?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 10) Will you block an incoming invoice until the quality inspection has been successfully
completed or if the lot is rejected for payment? (Note: The block can be manually removed if
required).
A:
Q: 11) Will you pre-approve a vendor sample prior to releasing the delivery? Please
describe the procedure.
A:
A:
9.3. QM in Production
9.3.1. Routing
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you have different production methods for the same material (e.g. dependent on
the lot size)? Are there several routing alternatives for one material?
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to schedule the routings in order to determine the dates for all
operations?
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do you have operations for which you envisage external processing, that is that your
vendor will process?
A:
Q: 7) To determine the execution time, the capacity requirement and the costs you require
standard values. Which ones (labor time, machine time, set-up time etc.)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) Will you require special user-defined fields in your routing for information and printing
purposes?
A:
Q: 11) Do you require standardized long texts for the operations (standard text keys)?
A:
Q: 12) What requirements are there regarding change management? How should the
validity be defined (based on date or freely definable parameters)? Will existing change
histories have to be transferred to the R/3 system?
A:
Q: 13) What requirements do you have regarding routing management (copy functions,
mass changes etc.)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Will you have several alternative recipes for one material (for example, depending on
the lot size) and do you want these to be combined (recipe group)?
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you use formulas to calculate the quantities of the components (material quantity
calculation)? Do you want characteristic values such as concentration to be taken into
account?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of changes? How do
you want the validity of the recipe to be defined?
A:
Q: 9) Will you require an approval procedure to change recipes? Will a digital signature be
required (change request/order)?
A:
Q: 10) Which relationships will exist between the phases within a recipe?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 14) Which standard values will you use for the operations (for example, labor time,
machine time, setup time)?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 18) Will special user fields be required in the master recipe for information and printing
purposes?
A:
Q: 19) Besides the actual processing unit, will further resources be allocated to an operation
(secondary resources) that are, for example, only used for a limited time (for example, labor,
transportation trucks)? Do you want them to be relevant for confirmation
A:
Q: 20) Which objects will be allocated to the phases (for example, components, production
resources/tools)?
A:
Q: 21) Will temporary materials (INTRA) with separate material numbers be produced
during the production process that will be processed further immediately instead of being
delivered to storage?
A:
Q: 22) Will you carry out in-process quality inspections, (assigning inspection characteristics
to phases)?
A:
Q: 23) Should the recording of inspection results be carried out in QM? Or should it be dealt
with in the PI-Sheet (either by a QM-Jump or by sending the information via the process
message)?
A:
Q: 24) Which requirements will you have regarding the management of master recipes
(copy function, mass changes, etc.)?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Will you manage quality management documents (customer agreements about quality
assurance and technical terms of delivery)? Give an example.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Would it be an advantage for you to access quality assurance documents in the R/3
System?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you usually have several technical objects for a customer that you want to
represent together? Do you require additional functionality to structure this accordingly?
A:
Q: 2) If yes, which technical objects from customer sites should be combined using
functional locations?
A:
Q: 3) Do you manage objects that are immovable and that usually have a long operational
life (for example, clarification plants)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 6) What do the hierarchy levels of the functional locations represent (for example, cost
center levels, production process levels)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 8) How detailed should the functional location hierarchy be (for example, number of
levels, installation and dismantling of equipment)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) How detailed should the last level of the hierarchy for functional locations be?
A:
Q: 11) Is it sometimes the case in your company that functional location numbers change
(for example, if you assign part of a technical system to another technical system)?
A:
Q: 12) Do you need to assign different numbers to functional locations (for example, (a)
from a procedural perspective and (b) from a measurement/control system perspective)?
A:
Q: 13) How should the different levels be linked together with regard to the transfer of data?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 15) Do you need to record the performance of functional locations using measuring
points and counters?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 16) If yes, is counter reading data transferred between the different levels?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 17) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
Q: 18) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that
are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.
A:
Q: 20) Do you want to analyze what influence the usage conditions have on the
susceptibility to damage of the installed equipment?
Explanation: For example, if there is a connection between breakdown frequency and usage
site. If yes, you should work with functional locations.
A:
Q: 21) Do you need to document your technical objects according to their usage time for
functional locations?
A:
Q: 22) Do you determine the business partners (internal and/or external) whose
address(es) you require, if you need maintenance requests for a particular functional
location?
A:
Q: 23) Do you want to archive master records for functional locations? If yes, provide a
copy of your document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving
requirements.
A:
Q: 24) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects
(functional location, equipment) user-specific?
A:
9.5.2. Equipment
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) List and describe the different categories of equipment that you maintain.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to create your own serial numbers or do you use the serial number of the
manufacturer as a reference/key for that object?
A:
Q: 6) If you use serial numbers, on which level do you want to track their history (including
costing, statistics, and so on)?
A:
Q: 7) Does your equipment include particular assemblies that you want to handle
individually in order to perform damage and cost analyses? Describe them.
A:
Q: 8) Do you represent the different types of equipment using material master records in
conjunction with Materials Management (for example, inventory management, goods
movements)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Does your equipment include larger components that you want to handle individually,
in order to create damage and cost analyses for them?
A:
Q: 10) Specify business partners (internal and/or external) for whom you require an address
when you need maintenance requests for a particular piece of equipment.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 12) Do you need to link documents (for example, drawings, manuals) to equipment
master records? If yes, give some examples.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) Do you measure and log the current condition of the equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? If yes, describe the measuring points and
counters, which you use for different pieces of equipment.
A:
Q: 14) Do you track warranties? If yes, are you a guarantor, a warrantee, or both?
Explanation: There are two different warranty types in the R/3 System: - Customer warranty
(you are the guarantor for your customers) - Vendor warranty (you are the warrantee of your
vendors) Both warranty types can be linked to an object at the same time (for example, if you
sell goods on to a customer, for which you yourself have already received a warranty from
your vendors).
A:
Q: 15) Describe the different warranties for your equipment, and specify whether these
should be recorded individually for each piece of equipment.
A:
Q: 16) Do you want to obtain a note on the warranty automatically for a positive warranty
check result?
A:
Q: 17) Does a technician in your company require a special work permit before starting
work on specific equipment?
A:
Q: 18) Does old data (for example, equipment master records, repair histories or
information about technical objects) have to transferred? Give a typical example.
A:
Explanation: You can use the SAP classification system to (1) provide additional fields that
are not currently available in SAP, or (2) search for technical objects and categorize them.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 21) Which changes to equipment do you want to document with a usage list?
A:
Q: 22) Do you want to make the screen templates for processing technical objects
(functional location, equipment) user-specific?
A:
A:
Q: 24) Do you want to archive equipment master records? If yes, provide a copy of your
document archiving procedure. If this is not available, describe specific archiving
requirements.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the single cycle maintenance
plan?
A:
A:
9.5.4. Multiple Counter Plan
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you use cycle sets for the attachment of multiple counter plans?
A:
Q: 3) Which counters for which technical objects (functional locations, equipment) should be
assigned to the individual maintenance cycles?
A:
Q: 4) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?
A:
A:
A:
Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within the
first year.
A:
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) What criterion is the maintenance cycle based on for the strategy-based maintenance
plan?
A:
Q: 2) Which time-base should be used (for example, calendar, factory calendar, key dates)?
A:
A:
A:
Explanation: For example: An inspection is performed every six months, but not within the
first year.
A:
A:
Q: 1) Do you possess technical objects that are required for detailed technical information in
order to introduce necessary error handling?
Explanation: Creation of a solution database with information on errors which have occurred
(symptoms) and proposed solutions.
A:
Explanation: For example, in the case of the employee responsible being insufficiently
qualified or very complex technical facts.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Do recurring problems constantly appear during notification processing that are linked
with a complex solution process?
A:
A:
Q: 5) Is error diagnosis an essential step in your area or is it "only" used for short-term error
handling?
A:
Q: 6) Are you already using (computer-supported) Help for error analysis and handling
based on a knowledge or error database?
A:
9.6.1. Symptom
Questions:
A:
Q: 1) Do you currently obtain your MSDS phrases, hazardous substance data, ICD codes,
EWC codes, and so on from content providers?
A:
Q: 2) Do you use in phrases in such a large number of languages that you need a number
of code pages (for example, 1100, 1500, 8000)?
A:
A:
10.1.1. Substance
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Are you the first in your country to use or import some hazardous substances? How
many substances?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) What are the existing types of substances, for example, pure substances, hazardous
substances, products, preparations, other?
A:
Q: 9) Which views does your substance master have, for example, physical-chemical data,
toxicological data, legal requirements, legal ratings, proven technical knowledge?
A:
Q: 10) Are you familiar with the EH&S standard properties tree and to what extent does it
fulfill your requirements?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 11) Is your substance data subject to different levels of confidentiality. Which ones
(internal, official, released, other)?
A:
A:
Q: 13) For which jurisdictions do you enter substance data and/or create substance reports,
for example, EU, USA, Japan?
A:
Q: 14) Which data provider supplies your data and in what format?
A:
A:
Q: 16) Do you distribute your substance data to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?
A:
Q: 17) What relationship exists between your substances and your materials, for example
1:1, 1:n, n:m, other?
A:
Q: 18) Do you maintain the notification status for your products? If so, for which substance
lists?
A:
10.1.2. Phrase
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Which phrase libraries (text modules) do you use? Which languages are they in?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Do you still use your existing phrase libraries or are they to be harmonized or
replaced?
A:
Q: 4) Do you use external services such as translation or update services for your phrases?
A:
A:
10.1.3. Report
Questions:
Q: 1) Which categories of substance reports do you use and/or create, for example, MSDS,
labels, TREMcards, standard operating procedures, other?
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do the contents and the structure of the standard report templates fulfill your
requirements?
A:
Q: 4) How many different material safety data sheets exist in your enterprise?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 12) Do you want to define your own objects for report management in addition to the
existing objects "person who had accident, material master, substance master, work area"?
A:
Q: 1) How is the dangerous goods organization in your enterprise governed and which
enterprise area performs which tasks?
A:
A:
Q: 3) Which areas also require read access to dangerous goods data and for what
purpose?
A:
Q: 4) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and dangerous goods
management organized in your enterprise?
Explanation: Important for link between accident reports in accordance with the German
dangerous goods officer directive (GbV) and incident/accident management (workers'
compensation association).
A:
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) On the basis of which validity areas/regulations are dangerous goods shipped, for
example, IMDG, IATA, ADR, 49 CFR?
A:
Q: 3) Which modes of transport are used for shipping: road, sea, air, rail, inland waterway?
A:
Q: 4) Which shipping types are used in connection with the modes of transport, for
example, road (shipping company), postal service, parcel service, courier service?
A:
Q: 5) Do you make use of exceptions and exemptions when transporting dangerous goods?
A:
Q: 6) Do you have different UN numbers for different dangerous goods regulations in your
product range?
A:
Q: 7) Do you want to transfer dangerous goods data from existing systems or obtain data
from providers?
A:
Q: 8) Which data provider supplies you with regulations data and in what format?
A:
Q: 9) Which product groups do you have to classify as dangerous goods, for example,
paints, solvents, key chemicals?
A:
Q: 10) How many different dangerous goods ratings do you have? How big is your
dangerous goods product range?
A:
A:
A:
A:
10.2.2. Phrase
Questions:
Q: 1) Which phrase libraries (text modules) do you use? Which languages are they in?
A:
Q: 2) Do you still use your existing phrase libraries or are they to be harmonized or
replaced?
A:
Q: 3) Do you use external services such as translation or update services for your phrases?
A:
10.2.3. TREMcard
Questions:
Q: 1) Are there completed tremcards available in your enterprise? In what format are they?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Are transport documents created in your enterprise or are they created externally?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
10.3. Waste
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 9) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and waste management
organized in your enterprise?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 12) Do you want to distribute waste costs proportionally among the cost centers that
generated the waste (coordination with FI-CO)?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 16) Do you distribute your master data to other R/3 Systems (ALE)?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are there materials for this waste which you have to take back (for example, for
packaging materials) ?
A:
Q: 3) Are there any wastes of similar types that may have to be assigned to different waste
codes (owing to origin or disposer)?
A:
10.3.1.2. Specifications
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Which are the jurisdictions for which you enter waste properties and/or create reports?
A:
Q: 2) Do you also use internal company waste descriptions parallel to the descriptions in
official waste catalogs?
A:
Q: 3) Do you make your own waste analyses and do you manage them in the system?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Are there different disposal channels for one and the same waste (price/quantity
selection, interface to MM)?
A:
Q: 6) Do waste approval books need to be created by the disposer for the waste generator?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Are waste approvals managed or created with EDP support (specification database or
inbound document)?
A:
A:
Q: 3) Are waste quantities recorded and managed in conjunction with the waste approval
procedure?
A:
Q: 4) Is the handover of wastes recorded and managed (note: dock receipts, waste
manifests)?
Explanation: Basis for creating waste life-cycle analyses with EDP support.
A:
Q: 5) In addition to the data for waste approvals, is data on transporters and disposal
facilities stored electronically (for example, planned disposal facilities, scope of a transport
license)?
A:
A:
Q: 7) Are the costs in connection with the waste approval procedure (creating, analyses
etc.) entered and managed?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Explanation: The following roles have been defined: report recipient, external persons,
physician, hospital.
A:
A:
Explanation: If not, this means certain accident processing functions will be restricted.
A:
Explanation: If not, this means no downtimes and no accident statistics can be determined.
A:
Explanation: If not, this means certain functions for technical safety measures and
incident/accident management will be restricted.
A:
Explanation: If not, this means certain hazardous substance register functions will be
restricted.
A:
A:
Q: 8) Which companies is your industrial hygiene and safety organization responsible for
and in which jurisdiction are they based?
A:
Q: 9) How is industrial hygiene and safety and the role of safety officer organized in your
enterprise (area) and which enterprise area performs which tasks?
A:
Q: 10) How is the industrial hygiene and safety organization mapped in data processing?
A:
Q: 11) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and occupational health
organized in your enterprise?
Explanation: Important for data transfer between injury/illness log and incident/accident
management.
A:
Q: 12) How is cooperation between product safety and industrial hygiene and safety
organized in your enterprise?
A:
Q: 13) Are external service agents used to perform tasks and which tasks do they perform?
A:
Q: 14) Which tasks are performed centrally and which tasks decentrally in the respective
areas of responsibility?
A:
Q: 15) Which access authorizations or restrictions are necessary for entering and
evaluating master data and movement data?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 18) Do you want health and safety briefings in your enterprise to be documented with
EDP support?
Explanation: Until this function has been included in the EH&S component, Training and
Event Management (HR, company instructions) is used to provide the function.
A:
A:
Q: 20) Do you want site inspections in your enterprise to be documented with EDP support?
A:
10.4.1. Phrase
Questions:
Q: 1) Which phrase libraries (text modules) do you use? Which languages are they in?
A:
Q: 2) Do you still use your existing phrase libraries or are they to be harmonized or
replaced?
A:
Q: 3) Do you use external services such as translation or update services for your phrases?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
A:
Explanation: The use of patterns (sample work areas) can reduce the amount of time and
effort needed to enter and update data.
A:
Q: 3) How are the work areas structured (hierarchical work area structure)?
A:
Explanation: Work area-related and/or substance-related agent types are possible; specific
information is stored directly under the work area.
A:
Q: 5) How do you assign the work area to existing organizational structures (plant, cost
center, storage location, work center, functional location)?
A:
Q: 6) Do you have specific software for managing your work areas? Which software is this?
A:
Q: 7) Are there any existing work areas in your legacy system that can be used?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which data is managed within the scope of the work center and risk assessment?
A:
A:
Q: 3) What types of agents are there in your enterprise (for example, chemical substances,
noise, psychological factors)?
A:
A:
Explanation: Can you group persons with the same exposure to form exposure groups? To
keep the time and effort spent on data maintenance to a minimum, the number of exposure
groups should be selected carefully.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have any work areas or persons with agents that change constantly?
A:
Q: 7) Do you have any persons with work areas that change constantly?
A:
Q: 8) Are you also responsible for external persons or employees of other companies?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Do you require country-specific reference values? If so, for which countries?
A:
Q: 11) Do you take the measurements yourself? If so, which procedure do you use?
A:
Q: 12) Do you have specific software for managing your agent data? Which software is
this?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Is there any existing agent data in your legacy system that can be used?
A:
10.4.4. Accident
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you only document accidents that have to be reported or all incidents with or
without injury to persons?
A:
Q: 2) Do you record cross-group and cross-country statistics for incidents and accidents?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you have any special software for managing incident/accident data? Which
software is this?
A:
Q: 9) Is there any existing incident/accident data in your legacy system that needs to be
transferred?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Only technical safety measure categories can be tracked subsequently in Plant
Maintenance (PM).
A:
A:
A:
A:
10.4.6. Report
Questions:
Q: 1) Are there any completed standard operating procedures in your enterprise? In which
format are they?
A:
Q: 2) Are the existing standard operating procedures related to substances or work areas or
both?
A:
A:
Explanation: The following roles have been defined: health center, physician, laboratory.
A:
Explanation: The following objects can be used: exposure group, position, job, task.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Explanation: If not, this means certain accident processing functions will be restricted.
A:
Explanation: If not, this means no downtimes and no accident statistics can be determined.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do you have one or more of your own health centers or do you work with external
service agents?
A:
Q: 7) How is cooperation between industrial hygiene and safety and occupational health
organized in your enterprise?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) How is occupational health including first-aiders and company paramedics organized
in your enterprise (area) and which enterprise areas perform which tasks?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 12) Which tasks are performed centrally and which tasks decentrally in the respective
areas of responsibility?
A:
Q: 13) Do you want to document medical examination results in addition to the legal
requirements (protocol log)?
A:
Q: 14) Which access authorizations or restrictions are necessary for entering and
evaluating master data and movement data?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What types of agents are there in your enterprise (for example, chemical substances,
noise, psychological factors)?
A:
A:
Explanation: Can you group persons with the same exposure to form exposure groups? To
keep the time and effort spent on data maintenance to a minimum, the number of exposure
groups should be selected carefully.
A:
Q: 4) Do you have any work areas or persons with agents that change constantly?
A:
Q: 5) Do you have any persons with work areas that change constantly?
A:
Q: 6) Are you also responsible for external persons or employees of other companies?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 9) Do you take the measurements yourself? If so, which procedure do you use?
A:
Q: 10) Is there any existing agent data in your legacy system that can be used?
A:
10.5.2. Protocols
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Which of the following occupational health services does your Occupational Health
dept. offer?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do you have health surveillance protocols and appointments in your legacy system
(protocol log) that are to be transferred?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you have examination results in your legacy system that are to be transferred?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you save the results of the medical tests (blood count, audiograms, and so on)?
A:
10.5.5. Questionnaire
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does a collection of occupational health questions already exist which are coded for
statistics purposes?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Which of the following types of injury/illness log entry do you want to use?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you have a specific software program for keeping the first aid log?
A:
Q: 6) Is there any existing data in your legacy system that you want to transfer?
A:
A:
10.5.9. Reports
Questions:
Q: 1) Which of the predefined reports for the medical service do you require?
A:
Q: 1) What procedure do you use when you need to create new account numbers?
Explanation: This can occur centrally or decentralized; Sample accounts can be used.
A:
Q: 2) Can you define groups of general ledger accounts that require similar information in
the master record?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 4) For which general ledger accounts do you wish to display line items?
A:
Q: 5) Which accounts do you wish to manage on an open item basis (for example, bank
clearing accounts)?
A:
Q: 6) Which accounts do you wish to maintain in foreign currency (for example, bank
accounts)?
A:
Q: 7) Describe any special requirements when posting to particular general ledger accounts
(for example, expense accounts require an associated cost center).
A:
Explanation: Matchcode
A:
A:
11.2. Ledger
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you have special statutory accounting requirements that are not covered in other
R/3 applications? Example: Currency translation of a foreign subsidiary, different fiscal year
ends to the international trading partner.
A:
Q: 3) Have you defined the necessary domains and data elements in the ABAP Dictionary?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chart
of accounts (US GAAP, IAS, HGB)?
Explanation: Several FS items can be used within one dimension. Therefore financial
statements can be created parallel according to different requirements.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level?
Explanation: How is the data reported - on account level or item level? How is the data
reported - on account level or item level?
A:
Explanation: The illustration of such classifications takes place via the field "item category".
Characteristic values would be for example "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".
sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".
A:
Q: 7) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/L
chart of accounts or a financial statement version.
Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the
unit integration. the unit integration.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 8) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for posting
deferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancing
adjustment.
Explanation: ANI Balance sheet ANI Income statement Deferred income task balance sheet
Deferred income task income statement FS balancing adjustment item Unappropriated
retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings
A:
11.3.2. Subitem
Questions:
Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - Subitem category asset
transaction type numerical characteristic value 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your own
characteristic values? Or do you want to use your own characteristic values?
A:
Q: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Sets are aggregations of context-releated elements. Sets are needed in all
kinds of areas, such as data collection, currency translation, interunit elimination and
reporting. You can make life easier by using suitable set names when defining sets.
A:
Q: 1) Describe the relationship between the Financial Accounting fiscal year and the Funds
Management fiscal year (Budget year/ budget periods)
A:
Q: 2) Provide more details on the number of budget periods, special adjustment periods
and description of what is accomplished/processed in this special periods.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Are there special budgetary structures to cover interim periods / special periods (e.g. if
budget has not been approved in time: provisional budgets)? How are these structures
related to the budget structures of the adopted budget?
A:
A:
Explanation: Describe the current budget organizational structure (budget hierarchy). Please
explain the current existing nomenclature/numbering (list the organizational units that are
responsible for the budget)
A:
Q: 6) Are there any legal requirements for nomenclature /structure of the master data?
A:
A:
Q: 8) Describe the changes that may be made to the budget structure (master data) within a
year.
A:
Q: 9) Describe the changes that may be made to the budget structure (master data) over a
period of years.
A:
Q: 10) Describe the quantity and timing of changes of the budget structure
A:
Q: 11) Describe which information objects (master data) have to remain online in the
system, and for how long.
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Explain which legacy data (historical data) needs to be transferred from the previous
system to Funds Management (level of detail, number of years, ...).
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the funds center?
Describe the existing (planned) structure.
A:
Q: 2) Generate a list of all information to be stored at funds center level (list of fields, short
description, and properties of fields).
A:
Q: 3) Which information could be changed for a funds center? Create a list of all fields/field
contents.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the commitment
item? Describe the existing (planned) structure.
A:
Q: 2) List the information to be stored at commitment item level (list of fields, short
description, and properties of fields).
A:
Q: 3) Which information may possibly be changed for a commitment item? Generate a list
of all fields/field contents.
A:
11.4.3. Fund
Questions:
Q: 1) Generate a list of funds origins (funds, funds from secondary sources). Are these
funds from secondary sources budgeted and assigned separately? Should these funds be
displayed separately for budgeting and execution?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Provide an overview of the different fund types (for example, special revenue,
donations,....).
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 6) Is it possible to group the used funds (from secondary sources)? If so, describe the
groups and the funds belonging to them.
A:
Q: 7) Do you have special funds for internal services? How do you distribute the accrued
expenses to other funds?
A:
Q: 8) Do you have to produce financial statements by funds, fund groups, or fund types?
Provide an overview of those funds. (USA)
A:
Q: 9) Are budget/actual reports produced for funds/fund groups/fund type levels? Provide
an overview.
A:
Q: 10) Is there any special nomenclature (organization) for the name of the fund? Describe
the existing (planned) structure.
A:
Q: 11) List the information to be stored at application of funds/funds level (list of fields, short
description, and properties of fields).
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 12) Which information could be changed for a fund? Create a list of all fields/field
contents.
A:
Q: 13) Do you have endowment funds? If so, please provide detailed information.
A:
Q: 14) Do you have grants (to be repaid, or not to be repaid) that are part of your budget but
are managed separately? If so, provide detailed information.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the application of
funds? Describe the existing (planned) structure.
A:
Q: 2) List the information to be stored at application of funds/funds level (list of fields, short
description, and properties of fields).
A:
Q: 3) Which information may possibly changed for an application of funds? Generate a list
of all fields/field contents.
A:
12. Treasury
12.1. General
12.1.1. Business Partner
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which bank accounts do you use to process payments for your money market
transactions?
A:
Q: 2) Provide an overview of your house banks (the banks you have accounts with).
A:
12.1.3. Limits
Questions:
Q: 1) For each limit, specify which flows should be included in the calculation (only assets,
only liabilities, both assets and liabilities) and whether the amounts should be added or
subtracted.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Make a qualified estimate of your average positions for each class (annual average).
A:
Q: 2) Specify the quantities for each product group (number of securities accounts, number
of positions per securities account, number of classes).
A:
A:
12.2.2. Reference
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to group your securities accounts into position valuation units (across
several securities accounts)?
A:
Q: 3) How do you split the positions in securities accounts that are not part of the premium
reserve fund into residual assets, restricted assets and unencumbered assets? (Germany)
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How do you structure the balance sheet accounts for securities in the general ledger
(determination of account assignment reference)?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
12.3. Loans
12.3.1. Loan Products
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) According to which criteria have you classified your loan portfolio (for example,
according to product, term, ...)?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do you post loans on the basis of customer accounts? (are payments monitored?)
A:
12.3.2. Collateral
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) To what extent do you manage guaranteed loans? Who are the relevant guarantors?
To which loan products do guarantees apply?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) What other collateral do you have to secure mortgage loans (e.g. life insurance)?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How do you determine collateral values? Who produces expert reports (technical
department, external expert)?
A:
Q: 2) What other collateral do you have to secure mortgage loans (e.g. life insurance)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you intend to use file management to control the loan process (e.g. have all the
required documents been received?), or merely to archive the filed documents?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) What are the resulting condition types (nominal interest, annuity repayment,
commitment interest)?
A:
Q: 3) To what extent do you manage variable-rate loans? Which loans are they?
A:
Q: 4) How do you adjust the conditions for loans due to expire (rollover)? Do you send
contract offers or contracts to the customer? Do you apply standard conditions or grant
individual conditions?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which yield curves are required? Which reference interest rates (interfaces) should be
used as a basis for defining the yield curves?
A:
12.4.3. Volatility
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you require your own volatility type for value at risk calculations?
A:
12.4.4. Reporting
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Which product types do you want to value differently from the standard?
A:
Q: 3) Which additional flows (such as premiums or charges) do you want to include in the
valuation?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to include net present values that have been calculated externally in the
mark-to-market position valuation?
A:
12.4.6. Scenario
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
12.4.9. Correlation
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Which risk factors do you want to consider for your risk evaluations?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Define primary cost elements based on the definition of the chart of account.
A:
Q: 2) Reserve a number range in the chart of accounts for the definition of CO-specific
accounts/primary cost elements: which additional primary cost elements do you need (such
as for accruals)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Define secondary cost elements for planning, allocation and reporting purposes.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Define cost element groups for planning, allocation, and reporting purposes.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Define cost centers as the lowest level in your organizational structure at which you
hold one person responsible for the expenses incurred (check whether you have covered the
whole organization).
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Take your corporate organizational structure and build a hierarchy according to levels
of responsibilities, with cost centers as the lowest level.
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Besides the standard hierarchy, do you need other alternative structure (groups) of
cost centers (for planning, allocation, and reporting purposes)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Define the type of activity performed by each cost center. Do this by defining one or
more measurable activity type(s) for each cost center.
A:
Q: 2) Since activity types are posted as secondary cost elements, have you specified the
secondary cost elements to which you want to assign the activity type (one-to-one, or one
cost element for more than one activity type)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Group your activity types into different categories or similar attributes for planning,
allocation and reporting purposes.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which statistical key figures do you want to use for allocations and reporting (such as
telephone units, headcount, and so on)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Define groups of statistical key figures (such as the group for all headcount statistical
figures).
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to define business processes across different areas of your organization
and plan, enter, and allocate overhead costs on the basis of these?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Unlike activity types, business processes can receive costs from more than one
cost center. The process costs can then either be allocated to Cost Object Controlling, or to
Profitability Analysis.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Define the standard hierarchy of processes for planning, allocating and reporting
business process costs.
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What business criteria do you use to classify your internal orders (for example,
overhead orders, accrual orders, investment orders, statistical orders, and so on)?
A:
Q: 2) What are the types of orders that will be used in the controlling area (such as
investments, marketing, etc.)?
A:
Q: 3) Should some of the orders be used for information purposes only - that is, should the
real posting be on the cost center?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Are you working with multiple supply sources (different vendors) or multiple production
methods (in-house production and subcontracting) for the same material?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Define the structure of your product cost components (40 cost components max)!
A:
A:
Explanation: Define the calculation method for each cost component: 1. Activity quantity x
activity price 2. Material quantity x price (standard price, moving average price, purchasing
info record......) 3. Process quantity x process price 4. Percentage overhead
A:
Q: 4) Do you require an alternative structure that breaks down the activity and process
costs in accordance with their original costs (such as wages, salaries, energy, depreciation)?
A:
Q: 5) Which cost components should be part of the product's cost of goods manufactured in
Profitability Analysis?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) If you are working with period-based controlling, do you want to have one cost
collector for each production method or for each material?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you intend to value the material with more than one currency or valuation
approach? What are those currencies/approaches?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) List the dimensions (characteristics) that you want to create contribution margin
accounting for, according to your reporting requirements.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) For the characteristics defined in the previous question, specify values (such as,
regions: North, west, east, south)
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) List the terms (characteristics) that do not have master data, and state how they are
dependent on other criteria.
A:
Q: 2) List the terms (characteristics) that are dependent on each other in a hierarchy.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Define the report rows (value fields) that you wish to analyze.
A:
Q: 2) Are you interested only in the revenues and costs that are directly related to product
sales?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Do you also wish to see other income or expenditures that are not related to your
regular business activity (e.g. product production or sales)?
A:
Q: 5) Decide which value fields can be posted as reconcilable with FI (true), and which are
to be filled with accrual valuations.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want information on accrued values for your result information, that are not
defined as conditions in SD, or do you require user-defined condition types in CO-PA for
planning purposes?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chart
of accounts (US GAAP, IAS, HGB)?
Explanation: Several FS items can be used within one dimension. Therefore financial
statements can be created parallel according to different requirements.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level?
Explanation: How is the data reported - on account level or item level? How is the data
reported - on account level or item level?
A:
Explanation: The illustration of such classifications takes place via the field "item category".
Characteristic values would be for example "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".
sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure".
A:
Q: 7) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/L
chart of accounts or a financial statement version.
Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the
unit integration. the unit integration.
A:
Q: 8) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for posting
deferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancing
adjustment.
Explanation: ANI Balance sheet ANI Income statement Deferred income task balance sheet
Deferred income task income statement FS balancing adjustment item Unappropriated
retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How many breakdown categories can be derived from your reporting system? Which
different details would you like to see within a consolidation chart of accounts?
Explanation: The requested detail of FS items is controlled via the breakdown category. The
details are delivered in standard by: - Partner - Transaction currency - Year of acquisition -
Subitem - if necessary up to 5 further custom characteristics - if necessary up to 5 further
custom characteristics
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: The split differences requires the detail of a FS item by transaction currency.
currency.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Explanation: Note: - cross-client setting - as the data base is to be extended, these settings
should occur at beginning of the project (empty data base required) - subsequent changes
are extremely problematic
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which standard subassignments would you like to use? What requirements do you
have for group reporting later on, for example, asset history sheets, equity aging reports,
segment reports, etc. ?
Explanation: For example to choose from: - Asset transaction type - Functional area - Region
- Year of acquisition - Period - Equity transaction type - Equity transaction type
A:
14.1.5. Subitem
Questions:
Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - Subitem category asset
transaction type numerical characteristic value 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your own
characteristic values? Or do you want to use your own characteristic values?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Sets are aggregations of context-releated elements. Sets are needed in all
kinds of areas, such as data collection, currency translation, interunit elimination and
reporting. You can make life easier by using suitable set names when defining sets.
A:
Q: 1) How many fixed assets and how many assets under construction do you currently
have?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you see a business need to use both internal and external number assignment,
depending on the asset class? If so, please specify.
A:
Q: 5) If you use external number assignment, do you want to allow the assignment of
alphanumeric numbers?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you want to represent asset components using asset sub-numbers? If so, for what
purposes do you plan to use asset sub-numbers?
A:
Q: 7) Are cost centers (business areas) to be defined in the asset master record on a time-
dependent basis?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 8) Do you see a business need to create multiple similar asset master records in one
step?
A:
Q: 9) Do you have assets that require increased depreciation due to multiple shift use?
A:
A:
Q: 11) How do you archive your asset master records at the present time?
A:
Q: 12) How long do you intend to continue to manage assets, which are no longer on hand
physically, in the system?
A:
Q: 1) Do you want to assign your own employee numbers or have the system generate
them for you? SAP recommends the use of system generated employee numbers after the
initial data conversion.
A:
Q: 2) With the use of third-party archiving systems, SAP allows you to store documents (eg
photographs, resumes, position description forms) for employee level. If you are using this
facility, which documents will be stored?
A:
A:
Q: 4) SAP allows you to maintain a free-text screen for all infotypes. Do you have the
requirement to store free text?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) When recording employee details, which other particulars (eg marital status,
nationality) do you wish to record?
A:
16.2.2. Challenge
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) If you are required to record the type of challenge, which types do you track?
A:
16.2.3. Addresses
Questions:
Q: 1) What address types would you like to maintain for your employees (eg permanent,
postal)?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: It is necessary to define a method of payment (eg direct payment, cheque) for
each employee being paid. The method of payment can be defined globally for all employees
Requirement Gathering Questions
or a different method for each country. If the direct payment option is to be used, consider
uploading the banks from disk. the banks from disk.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What relationships with other persons do you wish to maintain for your employees (eg
spouse, child, guardian, emergency contact, friend)?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) List the types of certificates which you would want to attach to employees.
A:
Q: 3) Identify which branches of study (eg subjects, course name) are to be recorded
against employees.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) If you wish to record previous employment history for your new employees, list which
Industry and Jobs you require.
A:
16.2.8. Qualifications
Questions:
Q: 1) If you are not using the qualifications catalogue within Personnel Development (PD),
list the qualifications (eg languages, skills) you would like to record for employees.
A:
16.2.9. Appraisals
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) In SAP you have the ability to record appraisals in either PA or PD. If you intend to
record appraisal ratings in PA, which types of performance criteria (eg Leadership,
Communication) and weightings do you require?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) List the entities against which employees may pay membership (eg health club, union
dues, professional organizations).
A:
A:
Explanation: You can, for example, calculate the union dues as a percentage of a
predetermined assessment base. This procedure takes minimum and maximum limits into
account. Alternatively, you can determine a fixed amount.
A:
Questions:
Explanation: You may record user identification numbers for various electronic media (eg
internet, fax) or company credit card numbers against each of your employees. employees.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you plan to register and manage information regarding the statuses of your foreign
employees' residence permits?
A:
A:
16.2.13. Registration of country of birth (act
stim.lab.part.ethn.minorities) NL
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Does your organization send this (statutory) statement to the Chamber of Commerce?
A:
Q: 2) Which employee categories do you wish to discern (education and job grade)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) SAP has the facility to record both ethnicity, Vietnam-related military service and
military reserve status. Does your company record any of this information and if applicable,
what ethnic groups are required?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you need to group your employees for security or reporting purposes according to
who administers their personnel records, payroll data or time data? If so, provide a list of
Administrators for personnel records, for payroll data and for time data.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 4) You should answer the following questions if your accounting system uses Funds
Management.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: Commitments are budget assignments that are created before the actual
postings. Commitments are used to reserve funds for future expenditure.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) This infotype is used to store the planned working time (work schedule rules). See
Time Management questionnaire.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) If you wish to record periods of notice which must be given by either the employee or
employer, list the standard notice periods.
A:
Q: 3) If you wish to record the start date of service worked in affiliated or acquired
companies, list the allowable standard corporations.
A:
Q: 4) Do you have employees who receive continued pay in case of illness in accordance
with the standard rules valid until June 30, 1994?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What medical examinations (eg audiometric, general habits, vision) would you like to
record for your employees?
A:
Q: 2) For each medical examination, list the specific tests or areas for which you want to
record medical data.
A:
Q: 3) For each specific test or area, detail the typical results (eg Y/N, x cm, blood type) you
might want to record.
A:
Q: 4) For each occurrence of a medical examination, what overall results (eg fit for work)
would you like to record?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) SAP allows you to monitor and to report on the expiration of certain key events (eg
probation, work permit, medical examination). Which key events do you wish to record?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) List the different types of powers of attorney (or similar instruments) which can be
recorded against your employees.
A:
Questions:
Explanation: What are the key dates you want to record against employees that are used for
evaluations? Some of these dates may differ to another similar date recorded elsewhere in
the system (eg a hire date for purposes of leave accruals, hire date for service anniversary).
A:
Q: 2) Do you have additional, payroll-relevant key dates that differ from the actual entry
date?
Explanation: Differing key dates occur when a time before employment in the current
company is taken into account. Typical examples include: Typical examples include: -Key
date for severance pay -Key date for leave -Continued remuneration -Continued
remuneration
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Stellen Sie eine Liste der Dienstzeiten bereit, die Sie bei der Ermittlung der
ruhegehaltfähigen Dienstzeiten berücksichtigen müssen.
A:
Q: 2) Stellen Sie die Bescheinigung zur Festsetzung des Ruhegehaltssatzes zur Verfügung.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) This infotype records internal data on each employee (eg previous personnel number,
work center information). Which of these elements will your company record?
A:
16.3.10. Statistics
Questions:
Q: 1) SAP gives you the ability to store and evaluate user-defined statistics (eg size of
safety equipment). What statistics do you need to maintain for your employees?
A:
Questions:
A:
16.3.12. Corporate Function
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) List the different organizational roles (do not confuse with positions and jobs) which
can be assigned to your employees.
Explanation: These roles are typically cross-functional and not necessarily related to a
person#s primary position (eg first aid officer, sexual haressment officer).
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) List the standard instructions or other activities (eg high voltage switching, orientation,
recognition award) which you might want to record against an employee.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you wish to record the loan of company property (eg PCs, mobile telephones) and
an identifying number against employees? If so, list these items.
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Explanation: NOTE: The 'employment status' and 'shift type' can be reported on from the
infotype or from the report parameters. NOTE: The various CBS wage elements must be
linked to the SAP wage type catalogue.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
16.3.18. CBS NL
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Provide details of any groups of employees for whom automatic assignment to pay
scale structure is appropriate?
Explanation: It is possible to automatically update an employee's pay scale group or level for
a set period depending on your business rules (ie age and time-related increases). time-
related increases).
A:
Q: 3) Will your company perform global salary increases and, if so, provide the details?
Explanation: You can also make global salary increases for specific groups of employees
based on different methods (eg a set amount, a percentage). This can be achived in either
Compensation or Personnel Administration. Note: If a global salary increase is required
shortly after your go-live date, be aware of the effort required to complete this task. go-live
date, be aware of the effort required to complete this task.
A:
Q: 4) In your company, how is extra payment for overtime beyond that specified by the
collective agreement represented?
Explanation: You can deposit the overtime payment in a separate wage type. This prohibits
changes in the collective agreement from having an effect on overtime payments.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: You can register an agreement that includes overtime or a separate part of the
salary with either a fixed number of hours or a fixed amount that covers all hours.
A:
Q: 6) Do you use a case group catalog to define the payments? If so, give details here.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 7) Definir los convenios colectivos a los que están adscritos los empleados de la
empresa.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) ¿ Existen nivelaciones automáticas por convenio (por ejemplo saltos de categoria en
función de la antigüedad)?
A:
Q: 11) Defina en qué bases de valoración de deben incluir las cc-nóminas del infotipo
Emolumentos Básicos.
A:
Q: 12) Indique cuáles son las cc-nóminas que componen el sueldo fijo.
A:
Q: 13) Defina cuáles son los haberes que se acumulan para el pago del plus por zona
desfavorable.
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Explanation: Family-related bonuses include different child and spousal elements. Family-
related bonuses include different child and spousal elements.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Do you also require the child increase amount for the special bonus?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) SAP has Infotypes for making specific payments to third parties on behalf of
employees (eg Loans, Garnishments, Membership Fees). Which additional payments to third
parties do you require?
A:
16.4.4. Tax
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization make use of: special employee groups (e.g. artists?)
conversion rules green table and/or holiday
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 5) After which payroll period do you want to create employment tax statements?
A:
Explanation: Zur Auswahl stehen folgende Möglichkeiten: - Regelungen für Aushilfen nach
§40a EStG (kurzfristig Beschäftigte und geringfügig Entlohnte) - Regelungen für
beschränkt Steuerpflichtige nach §50a EStG - Regelungen für einzelne Bezüge nach §40
und §40b EStG (z.B. Essensgeld, Fahrgeld, Zukunftssicherungsleistungen)
A:
Q: 7) What procedure do you want to use for collecting flat-rate church tax?
Explanation: Die pauschale Kirchensteuer kann entweder - für alle Mitarbeiter mit einem
ermäßigten Hebesatz oder - nur für die kirchensteuerpflichtigen Mitarbeiter mit dem
normalen Satz erhoben werden.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization make use of the employee insurance statement? If so, which
one?
A:
Q: 2) Does your organization provide a private health insurance scheme? If so, please
specify.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 6) Does your organization provide additional SI schemes (e.g. ANW gap, early
retirement, etc.)? If so, which ones?
A:
Q: 7) Create a list of all the state health insurance funds used in your enterprise.
Explanation: Achten Sie auf folgende Kriterien: - Bezeichnung der Krankenkasse und deren
Geschäftsstellen - Anschriften und Bankangaben bei den Geschäftsstellen - Betriebsnummer
und Rechtskreis (Ost/West) Beachten Sie, daß überregionale Krankenkassen zweimal
angelegt werden müssen, wenn Sie Betriebe in verschiedenen Rechtskreisen haben.
Anhand des Rechtskreises der Krankenkasse wird in der Abrechnung die entsprechende
Beitragsbemessungsgrenze für KV und PV verwendet. - Prozentsätze und Beitragsklassen -
Prozentsätze und Beitragsklassen
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Falls nein, d.h. alle Privatversicherten sind Selbstzahler, genügt es, eine
Privatkasse für alle anzulegen, da dann keine Anschriften und Bankangaben notwendig sind.
Ansonsten stellen Sie die Informationen analog zu den gesetzlichen Krankenkassen bereit.
Krankenkassen bereit.
A:
Q: 9) Which bonus calculation procedure do you use for employees voluntarily insured in a
statutory health insurance fund?
Explanation: Wenn die gesetzliche Krankenkasse den Beitrag für freiwillig Versicherte
anhand von Beitragsklassen erhebt, haben Sie eine Wahlmöglichkeit bei der Berechnung des
Zuschusses. Sie müssen als Zuschuß mindestens die Hälfte des Betrags zahlen, welcher
sich aus dem Prozentsatz multipliziert mit der Beitragsbemessungsgrenze ergibt. Sie können,
ohne daß ein geldwerter Vorteil entsteht, auch die Hälfte des Beitrags zahlen, der sich aus
der Beitragsklasse ergibt.
A:
Q: 10) Are there company areas in your enterprise for which contributions have to be paid?
Explanation: Erstellen Sie eine Liste der Betriebsteile und den zugeordneten Umlagekassen
mit den Prozentsätzen für Umlage 1 und Umlage 2.
A:
Q: 11) Do you make use of the option of sending contribution statements to a federal
association instead of individual HI funds?
Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der Bundesverbände mit ihren Anschriften,
Bankangaben und Betriebsnummern.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der DFÜ-fähigen Krankenkassen mit Ihren
Anschriften und Betriebsnummern. Diese DFÜ-Kassen sollen als eigene Krankenkassen
hinterlegt werden.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) Put together a list of the personnel areas/subareas, that could be senders of
statements of contributions paid
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 14) Create a list of all combinations of senders and receiving offices for the contribution
statements.
A:
Q: 15) Give an overview of the social security constellations legal in your enterprise.
A:
Q: 16) Listar los epígrafes a los que están adscritos los empleados.
A:
A:
16.4.6. Loans
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
16.4.7. Garnishment
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization make use of garnishment of wages? If so, please specify.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: Die Pfändung ermöglicht es, bestimmte Empfänger, die häufig als Gläubiger
auftreten, im System unter einem Schlüssel zu hinterlegen (z.B. Versandhäuser, Banken).
Die Bankverbindung dieser Empfänger kann dann zentral administriert werden.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: Die Pfändung ermöglicht es, bestimmte Gläubiger im System unter einem
Schlüssel zu hinterlegen (z.B. Versandhäuser, Banken). Die Anschriften dieser Gläubiger
können dann zentral administriert werden.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
16.4.8. Pension
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization provide (company) pension schemes? If so, which ones?
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
16.4.12. Deduction Limits CA, US
Questions:
Q: 1) List all deductions that have a maximum amount to be taken (eg united way, 401K
loans).
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) What special features exist when calculating ER bonuses for capital formation?
A:
Explanation: Necessary payee data: - Name and address of payee - Country of bank -
Sort code - Bank account number
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Specify a receiving office and forwarding office for each of the health fund types you
use.
Explanation: Payee funds are stored in the system as special health insurance funds.
A:
Explanation: Falls ja, erstellen Sie eine Liste der DFÜ-fähigen Krankenkassen mit Ihren
Anschriften und Betriebsnummern. Diese DFÜ-Kassen sollen als eigene Krankenkassen
hinterlegt werden. Für die Kommunikation mit den DFÜ-fähigen Annahmestellen wird eine
Zusatzsoftware (KKS - Krankenkassenkommunikationssystem) benötigt.
A:
Explanation: SAP empfiehlt den Produktivstart im Januar. Wenn Sie unterjährig starten
wollen müssen Sie für Ihre Mitarbeiter eine Abmeldung (vom Altsystem) und eine Anmeldung
(im SAP-System) vornehmen.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which procedure do you want to use to transfer the company insurance premium?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Explanation: Required data are: - Name and address of payee - Bank details (country, sort
code and account number) - Bank details (country, sort code and account number)
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Provide a list with the following information: - Name and address of
supplementary pension fund (SPF) - Bank details for SPF - Membership number -
Contribution rates - Registration number - Format for insurance number - Contribution
assessment thresholds - Contribution assessment thresholds
A:
A:
Q: 3) Is flat-rate taxation of contributions permitted? If so, to what amount? Do you use the
average method? Do you use annual or monthly taxation?
A:
Q: 4) Is the bonus subject to contributions? Is the bonus reduced with the contribution
months?
Explanation: Ist nur für einen Teil der Monate des Jahres Umlage gezahlt worden, ist die
Zuwendung ggf. nur für diesen Anteil zu verbeitragen. für diesen Anteil zu verbeitragen.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) If this case occurs during a month, are the actual gross elements still taken into
account?
Explanation: In this special case, the fictitious gross amount is used as the basis for the
contribution calculation for the whole payroll period. The real gross payments due for the paid
partial period are not taken into account in the contribution calculation. into account in the
contribution calculation.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 10) Stellen Sie die Datensatzbeschreibung der von Ihnen erstellten ZVK-Meldungen zur
Verfügung. Welche Felder sind zu füllen?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Provide the table for the calculation of the maximum official housing remuneration.
A:
Q: 2) Which pay elements are included in the official housing gross amount?
A:
Q: 3) Which family-related bonus elements are included in the official housing gross
amount?
A:
Explanation: The following information is required: - Name - Address - Local rental value -
Taxable rental value - Flat-rate for ancilliary costs - Flat-rate for ancilliary costs
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
A:
16.4.19. Non-Monetary Remuneration - PSG
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Will you calculate the pension payments using the SAP System?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
Explanation: If yes, provide a list of the payroll numbers you require. If yes, provide a list of
the payroll numbers you require.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Explanation: This is taxable depending on the employment office. This is taxable depending
on the employment office.
A:
16.4.24. Semiretirement DE
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you have semi-retired employees with different models? Describe these models.
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) List the name of Branch Offices for Social Insurance and Labor Insurance.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Define social insurance premium rates for each branch office for social/labor
insurance.
A:
Q: 5) Assign the amount and grade of monthly standard compesation to each employee
group/sub group combination.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) If your company has life/casualty insurance plan, define the names of the insurance
institusions and types. Also define the deduction amount of monthly/bonus payment.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) If your company has property accumulation savings plan, define the names of the
insurance institutions and types. Also define the deduction amount of monthly/bonus
payment.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
16.4.30. Union JP
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your company have labor unions? If so, provide numbers and names.
A:
A:
Q: 3) For each labor union, provide union membership fee calculation pattern for both
monthly and bonus payment.
Explanation: - How do you deduct the union memberhip fee? For example, deduction with
fixed rate from basic monthly payment; a given amount per employee; fixed amount as a
union membership fee. employee; fixed amount as a union membership fee.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Provide information about the commuting types, the date or month of payment,
frequency, the actual goods supplied or not.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Are there overseas assigned employees? If so, provide the payroll method and
pattern for them.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization provide any social fund schemes? If so, please specify.
A:
16.4.34. Commuting NL
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, how does your
organization determine the number of kilometers?
Explanation: NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or depending on address NOTE: Manual
entry, fixed number or depending on address
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, how does your
organization determine the number of days per week?
Explanation: NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or transfer from planned working time
NOTE: Manual entry, fixed number or transfer from planned working time
A:
Q: 3) Does your organization provide commuter allowance? If so, for which types of
transportation?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization make use of Premium Reductions (tax and social insurance
payments reductions law)? If so, which ones?
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Explanation: NOTE: Take type of childcare into consideration, who provides care and does
the employee pay a contribution does the employee pay a contribution does the employee
pay a contribution
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you allow employees to override the standard withholding calculations for taxes?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) If qualification deficits are detected, do you want the system to propose training
measures to rectify the situation?
A:
Q: 8) Do you try to find employees with specific qualifications, or employees suitable for
specific jobs/positions?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 2) For which period do you typically plan your compensation? From which period do you
select your data?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Do you use different ways to define your compensation manager than those defined in
the standard R/3 system?
A:
Q: 4) Which evaluation path do you use to determine which persons in the organizational
unit are to be included in the compensation administration process?
A:
A:
Q: 6) Which job evaluation method is most commonly used within your company and should
be used as a default?
A:
Q: 7) Which salary survey method is most commonly used within your company and should
be used as a default?
A:
Q: 8) Which date is used as the key date for the calculation of the annualized base salary?
A:
Q: 9) Which period do you consider to calculate an employees incentive pay for salary
survey reporting purposes?
A:
A:
18.2. Guidelines
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you use alternative guideline criteria that are not supported by the SAP standard
system (age, length of service, compa ratio, performance results)
A:
Q: 5) What criteria do you use for multidimensional calculation guidelines and how do you
segment them?
A:
A:
18.4. Adjustments
Questions:
Q: 1) Which wage types do you want to use to update an employees pay information?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you split your compensation adjustments into more than one wage type? Example:
Do you breakdown your merit increase into two wage types such as inflation adjustment and
salary increase?
A:
Q: 5) Which adjustment types do you use in your company (e.g. merit increase, bonus)? To
which compensation components do they belong (fixed or variable)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 1) Which events can have an impact on the number of shares available, price, ...?
A:
Q: 2) Which methods of payment does your company allow for long-term incentives?
A:
Q: 3) Which company or employee events may influence the life cycle of a long-term
icentive?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 9) Which and how can a certain life event influence the vesting of a long-term incentive?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
19. Benefits
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you administer benefits for two or more groups completely separately because of
differences such as the country, the participants are located in, or the currency used for
benefit calculations?
Explanation: Benefit areas are used to group employees by benefits offered, countries and
currencies. Most companies only use one benefit area unless they are administering benefits
in multiple countries or currencies.
A:
Explanation: What kind of benefit is provided by the plan? Who is going to pay for it? What
happens with the payments? Are dependents or beneficiaries allowed? Are there different
options for a single plan? Which group of employees is eligible for the plan? Does a third
party administrator calculate seniority and/or retirement benefits for any of your plans?
seniority and/or retirement benefits for any of your plans?
A:
Q: 3) Define the set of plan types you need and assign the plans to the types.
Explanation: Each benefit plan has to be assigned to a plan type, which itself belongs to one
of the categories health plans, insurance plans, savings plans, flexible spending accounts,
credit plans, miscellaneous plans, stock purchase plans. An employee can only have one
plan per plan type at a time. at a time.
A:
Explanation: If yes: You can define a plan status, for example, "closed", "locked". If yes: You
can define a plan status, for example, "closed", "locked".
A:
Q: 5) Who are the potential beneficiaries and dependents for your plans? Are there any
other criteria that define the eligibility of related persons?
A:
A:
Q: 7) For each plan, state the plan number (typically group policy or contract number), plan
status (open, locked, closed), and the benefit provider (vendor or carrier).
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
19.1. Plans
19.1.1. Health plans
Questions:
Q: 1) What dependent coverage levels are available to your employees (for example,
employee only, employee + 1, employee + family)?
A:
Q: 2) For each plan, determine whether the deductions are pre or post tax.
A:
Q: 3) For each plan, define the options the employee can choose.
A:
Q: 4) For each option and dependent coverage, determine which of the following criteria are
necessary to calculate employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age,
salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.
Explanation: For each of the plans from the health, insurance, and miscellaneous categories
defined, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate employer and/or
employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary, length of service, any customer
defined criteria.
A:
Q: 5) For each option and dependent coverage, provide the rate tables with appropriate
employee, employer, and/or provider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits.
A:
Q: 6) Do you require any evidence of insurability when covering employees under any
health plan? If so, when is it required?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) For each plan, determine whether the deductions are pre or post tax and whether the
plan is relevant for imputed income.
A:
Q: 2) For each plan, define the options the employee can choose.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) For each of the plans from the insurance and miscellaneous categories defined,
determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the coverage amount:
age, salary, length of service, any customer defined criteria.
A:
Q: 4) For each option, provide the tables with the definition of the coverage amount.
A:
Q: 5) For each option, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate
employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary, seniority, any
customer-defined criteria.
A:
Q: 6) For each option, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/or
provider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits.
A:
Q: 7) For each option, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/or
provider (vendor or carrier) costs.
A:
Q: 8) Do you require any evidence of insurability when covering employees under any
insurance plan? If so, when is it required?
A:
Q: 9) Are there any coverage limits which involve more than one plan? If so, how are the
limits defined?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the
employee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.
A:
Q: 2) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the
employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units.
Also specify whether contributions can be made pre and/or post tax.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the
employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units.
A:
Q: 4) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the
employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.
A:
Q: 5) For each plan, define the employer contribution as a fixed amount or as a percentage
of the employee contribution.
A:
Q: 6) For each plan, define the vesting schedule (for example, 100% after 5 years of
service).
Explanation: A vesting schedule defines the seniority needed to 'own' the employer
contribution to a savings plan. contribution to a savings plan.
A:
Q: 7) For each plan, list the investment options available to participants (for example,
mutual funds, stock, and so on).
A:
Q: 8) Are any of your savings plans retirement plans? Is it necessary to calculate seniority
for these plans?
Explanation: The SAP System supports the cumulation of pensionable earnings and hours
as well as the storage of seniority information. While projected retirement benefits must be
calculated by a third party administrator, seniority can be calculated either in the SAP System
(partial TPA scenario) or by a third party administrator (full TPA scenario). Describe the
process of calculating seniority and retirement benefits in your organization. In case of a
partial TPA scenario, describe in detail the rules for determining seniority. rules for
determining seniority.
A:
Q: 9) Are there any contribution limits which involve more than one plan? If so, how are the
limits defined?
A:
Q: 10) Are employees' contribution and employers' contribution deducted from periodical
bonus?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the
employee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.
A:
Q: 2) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the
employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units.
Also specify whether contributions can be made pre and/or post tax.
A:
Q: 3) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the
employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units.
A:
Q: 4) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate the
employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.
A:
Q: 5) For each plan, define the employer contribution as a fixed amount or as a percentage
of the employee contribution.
A:
Q: 6) For each plan, determine whether contributions are defined on the basis of a regular
period, for example, monthly or as a target amount for a fixed period.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What do you do with any balance existing either after a termination, or at the close of
the year?
A:
Q: 2) For each spending account, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to
calculate the employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.
A:
Q: 3) For each spending account, identify the annual maximum and minimum contribution.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate
employer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) For each plan, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to calculate
employer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.
A:
Q: 2) For each plan, provide the rate tables with appropriate employer credits.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) For each plan, decide which of the following attributes are relevant: costs, credits,
coverage, employee contribution, employer contribution, vesting, investments.
A:
Q: 2) For each plan, define the options the employee can choose.
A:
Q: 3) If costs are relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to
calculate employer and/or employee costs: gender, smoker/non-smoker, age, salary,
seniority, any customer-defined criteria.
A:
Q: 4) If costs are relevant, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer,
and/or provider (vendor or carrier) costs or credits.
A:
Q: 5) For each option, provide the rate tables with appropriate employee, employer, and/or
provider (vendor or carrier) costs.
A:
Q: 6) If credits are relevant, determine which of the following criteria are necessary to
calculate employer credits: age, salary, seniority, any customer-defined criteria.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) If credits are relevant, provide the rate tables with appropriate employer credits.
A:
A:
Q: 9) If coverage is relevant, provide the tables with the definition of the coverage amount.
A:
Q: 10) If employee contribution is relevant, determine which of the following criteria are
necessary to calculate the employee contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer
defined criteria.
A:
Q: 11) If employee contribution is relevant, define the limits for employee contributions and
state whether the employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary,
or number of units.
A:
Q: 12) If employee contribution is relevant, specify whether contributions can be made pre
and/or post tax.
A:
Q: 13) For each plan, define the limits for employee contributions and state whether the
employee can define the contribution as an amount, percentage of salary, or number of units.
A:
Q: 14) If employer contribution is relevant, determine which of the following criteria are
necessary to calculate the employer contribution: age, salary, seniority, any customer-
defined criteria.
A:
A:
Q: 16) For each plan, define the vesting schedule (for example, 100% after 5 years of
service).
Explanation: A vesting schedule defines the seniority needed to 'own' the employer
contribution to a savings plan. contribution to a savings plan.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 17) For each plan, list the investment options available to participants (for example,
mutual funds, stock, and so on).
A:
A:
Q: 2) Introduction
Explanation: For each group of employees, the time management requirements are based
on certain expectations. These expectations must be defined in the form of work schedules
for each of the groups of employees. This includes the description of possible deviations from
these expectations.
A:
Q: 3) Name your shifts. The following points will help you to define your shifts.
A:
Q: 4) Which patterns do your shifts use? For example, weekly, monthly, rotating.
A:
Q: 5) Describe the daily shifts. Specify start and end times, planned working hours and
breaks for each of these daily shifts. How do public holidays affect these daily shifts?
A:
Q: 6) Identify similar shifts (for example, early, day, night, flex) and patterns, (for example,
rotating, non-rotating).
A:
Q: 7) Do you have rules that change your daily shifts (for example, the last working day
before a holiday ends at noon)? Provide a list of such rules.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 8) Do you have part-time workers? How do you reflect that they are part-time? (A shift is
defined as part-time 8 hours on three days in the week, and they are assigned a percentage
of a full time shift, such as 50%).
A:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe the process of sickness and recovery notification and indicate which
information is provided and how.
A:
Q: 3) Does your organization make use of notifications of sickness and recovery? If so, to
whom are they sent?
A:
Q: 4) You must identify rules and policies, as they determine the kind of time data you
collect. What kind of data is collected? For example, do you need to record attendances,
absences, the time of day, and elapsed times?
A:
A:
Q: 6) Describe the different types of availability/on-call duties used in your company (such
as on-call for maintenance, on-call for emergencies).
A:
Q: 7) Describe the different types of attendances and absences used in your company
(such as vacation, sick, business meeting).
A:
Q: 8) Into which categories can the identified attendances and absences be placed?
Explanation: "What are the categories into which the identified attendances and absences
can be placed? Examples of possible criteria used to categorize your attendances and
Requirement Gathering Questions
absences are - costing and financial information - payment relevance - internal and external
reporting, statistics. "
A:
A:
Q: 10) For each attendance and absence, identify the amount and unit of time that can be
taken. Do you have attendances or absences of less than one day, one full day, or longer
than one day (up to a specified maximum)?
A:
Q: 11) There are various priorities for different attendances and absences. Therefore, you
must set the reaction for an overlap (for example if an employee gets sick on vacation). How
do you handle an overlap between attendances and absences?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Which of the identified absences are paid? How are they paid?
A:
Q: 1) Some attendances and absences affect time accounts, such as entitlements and
accruals. What accounts do you have, and how are they affected by specific attendances
and/or absences?
A:
Q: 2) What time accounts do you need? What time data is necessary for each account?
How often do you calculate the values for these accounts?
A:
Q: 3) What accounts do you need for statistical evaluation purposes (for example, all
absences, absences due to sickness, absences due to vacation, etc.)?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 5) Time account data may be required for reporting purposes outside of HR. For
example, the total number of paid absence hours accrued in a particular period may be of
relevance to the Controlling department.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 2) What kind of time events do you use (for example, clock-in, clock-out, start of break,
end of break, start of off-site work, end of off-site work, etc.)?
A:
Q: 3) Do certain time events apply to certain groups of employees, or are all time events
valid for all employees?
A:
Q: 4) Do your time recording processes include the identification of a reason for particular
time event? What are these reasons?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) If there is more than one business event location, do you need to define a location
hierarchy?
A:
Q: 1) Define the business event hierarchy for the business event catalog of the customer.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 1) Are rooms already available for the business events, or are external resources
accessed?
A:
Q: 2) Do the resources only consist of rooms, or do you want to use the system to manage
other resources too, such as beamers and overhead projectors?
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Are the instructors employees at the enterprise, or are they also external persons?
A:
A:
A:
21.7. Organizer Types
Questions:
A:
A:
I. Business Processes
1. Production Planning and Procurement Planning
1.1. Market-Oriented Planning
1.1.1. Sales and Operations Planning
1.1.1.1. Flexible Planning
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) How do you deal with overloads (for example, produce in other plants, reduce
quantity, enhance available capacity)?
A:
Q: 5) Define the level on which you want to carry out resource planning.
A:
Q: 6) Do you use a regular backup of your data to assure and check the quality of your
planning results?
A:
Q: 7) With which criteria do you want to take products out of the market?
A:
A:
Q: 9) How will you check you planning results (early warning system, using planned line as
key figure)?
A:
Q: 10) Determine the whole planning b integrating the strategy of using different planning
versions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data should be copied
from one versioned infostructure (origin) to another.
Explanation: Determine the whole scheduling integrating the strategy of using different
planning versions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data should
be copied from one versioned infostructure (origin) to some other versioned infostructure.
A:
Q: 11) Specify the tools for copying data and integrate this into the whole scheduling,
A:
Q: 12) When planning in different information structures/ versions, how do you want to
make sure that planning results are shared with other planners for overall planning
consistency?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) What kind of (key) figures do you hand over from one to the next planning
procedure?
A:
Q: 14) If the information structure is not used for reporting, the names of the standard key
figures can be changed individually within the planning type. What are the new names?
A:
A:
Q: 16) Do you want to use routings or rough cut planning profiles for capacity planning?
A:
Q: 17) Make sure that the planning hierarchy is consistent in each tree.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 18) How do you want to calculate the proportions of the master data in the planning
hierarchy?
A:
Q: 19) How often do you have to rework the planning hierarchy for the master data, and for
calculating the proportions?
A:
Q: 20) If you create the planning hierarchy automatically, which planning objects do you
want to exclude from the hierarchy when generating the master data by using a method?
A:
Q: 21) What are your planning objects (for example, product group, material, region)?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 26) Determine the planning time fence (2): how many periods should be visible/planned
in past time?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 27) Determine the level and the object where you want to do resource planning, for
example, on product hierarchy level evaluation of production line capacity or transport
capacity on a product group level.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 33) Which kind of formulas do you require for your planning processes and on which
level should the calculation be carried out?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 37) What information do you want to calculate but not save in the infostructure?
A:
Q: 38) What information on actual data you want to see in the planning phase?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 41) Which key figures should be visible, and which planned by each planner using the
corresponding planning type?
A:
Q: 42) Which key figures should be aggregated to a sum and/or average value, and which
key figures should not be aggregated at all?
A:
Q: 43) Which planning figures do you want to define for each of the planning procedures?
What are your objectives concerning optimization?
A:
A:
Q: 45) What are your goals when planning capacity in flexible planning?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 49) How often do you want to plan and how often do you need to maintain this plan?
A:
Q: 51) How do you want to maintain your available capacity (for example, by shift plan,
manually, by factory calendar)?
A:
A:
Q: 53) How do you want to organize the whole planning cycle in the time sequence?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 54) How do you want to launch new products (for example, when working with the
forecast tool, do you want to use the history of products that might behave similarly)?
A:
A:
Q: 56) What are the analyses based on the planning result compared to the analyses based
on actual data?
A:
A:
Q: 59) Do you want to plan components derived from the plan of finished materials (e.g.
attachments, spare parts)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 61) At which point(s) of time do you want to create capacity loads? Maintain this in the
time span periods in the rough cut planning profile.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to carry out medium to long-term planning of sales and production
quantities for your finished products?
A:
Q: 2) At what level do you want to carry out sales and operations planning?
A:
Q: 3) At what intervals do you want to carry out sales and operations planning?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How often are the results of Sales and Operations Planning transferred to Demand
Management, and how is this defined?
A:
Q: 2) Which strategies are used in the transfer of SOP results to Demand Management?
Explanation: - Direct transfer of sales plan material - Transfer sales plan material as a
proportion of a product group - Direct transfer master production schedule - Transfer master
production schedule as a proportion of a product group
A:
1.1.2. Forecast
1.1.2.1. Materials Forecast
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you establish material forecasts (for example, weekly, monthly, yearly) for your
stock materials?
Explanation: Analyze whether it is feasible and necessary. Often is does not have to be daily;
weekly is sufficient.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which planning strategies do you use to plan production quantities and dates?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant to
MRP.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you specify scenario description, time frame, and plant for long term lot size
production?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out scenario comparisons with other scenarios including the active
version?
A:
Q: 3) What business process will you use to update the operative version?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the material
requirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to transmit the planning results for external procurement in the
Purchasing Information System, to make further evaluations for the vendor forecast?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to prepare and evaluate the stock/requirements data, determined in long-
term planning, using the standard analysis, within Inventory Controlling.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to transfer the values determined for activity requirements in long-term
planning, as a planned payment to the Cost Center Accounting?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant to
MRP.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, be
planned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, is
only the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well?
A:
A:
Q: 7) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)?
A:
Q: 8) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? How
should purchase requisitions be treated in this case?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals.
A:
Q: 9) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 11) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders or
should an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacity
requirements.
A:
A:
Q: 13) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose of
common scheduling?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, be
planned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals
A:
Q: 5) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, be
planned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals
A:
Q: 5) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling and
correcting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP.
A:
Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the material
requirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant to
MRP.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, is
only the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well?
A:
A:
Q: 6) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)?
A:
Q: 7) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? How
should purchase requisitions be treated in this case?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals.
A:
Q: 8) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders or
should an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacity
requirements.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 12) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose of
common scheduling?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals
A:
Q: 4) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 9) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals
A:
Q: 4) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling and
correcting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP.
A:
Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the material
requirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Which criteria do you want to be taken into account during conversion (for example,
MRP controller, release date, material, sales order)?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant to
MRP.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, be
planned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, is
only the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well?
A:
A:
Q: 7) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)?
A:
Q: 8) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? How
should purchase requisitions be treated in this case?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals.
A:
Q: 9) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders or
should an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacity
requirements.
A:
A:
Q: 13) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose of
common scheduling?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, be
planned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals
A:
Q: 5) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, be
planned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, be
planned separately and not include planning of the dependent components?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals
A:
Q: 5) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling and
correcting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP.
A:
Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the material
requirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant to
MRP.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, is
only the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well?
A:
A:
Q: 6) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? How
should purchase requisitions be treated in this case?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals.
A:
Q: 8) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders or
should an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacity
requirements.
A:
A:
Q: 12) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose of
common scheduling?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals
A:
Q: 4) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 9) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 7) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals
A:
Q: 4) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling and
correcting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP.
A:
Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the material
requirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Which criteria do you want to be taken into account during conversion (for example,
MRP controller, release date, material, sales order)?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you establish material forecasts (for example, weekly, monthly, yearly) for your
stock materials?
Explanation: Analyze whether it is feasible and necessary. Often is does not have to be daily;
weekly is sufficient.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Enter all changes to master data, order modifications, PO changes etc. relevant to
MRP.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, is
only the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well?
A:
A:
Q: 6) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)?
A:
Q: 7) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? How
should purchase requisitions be treated in this case?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals.
A:
Q: 8) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders or
should an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacity
requirements.
A:
A:
Q: 12) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose of
common scheduling?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you want to firm and schedule purchase requisitions within the planning time
fence?
Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning
time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the
planning run does not create any new order proposals
A:
Q: 4) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is
required?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 9) Will the planning result be processed further after the planning run?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling and
correcting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP.
A:
Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the material
requirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example.
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Which criteria do you want to be taken into account during conversion (for example,
MRP controller, release date, material, sales order)?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 4) How do you deal with overloads (for example, produce in other plants, reduce
quantity, enhance available capacity)?
A:
Q: 5) Define the level on which you want to carry out resource planning.
A:
Q: 6) Do you use a regular backup of your data to assure and check the quality of your
planning results?
A:
Q: 7) With which criteria do you want to take products out of the market?
A:
A:
Q: 9) How will you check you planning results (early warning system, using planned line as
key figure)?
A:
Q: 10) Determine the whole planning b integrating the strategy of using different planning
versions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data should be copied
from one versioned infostructure (origin) to another.
Explanation: Determine the whole scheduling integrating the strategy of using different
planning versions. From that you should be able to derive at what point of time data should
be copied from one versioned infostructure (origin) to some other versioned infostructure.
A:
Q: 11) Specify the tools for copying data and integrate this into the whole scheduling,
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 12) When planning in different information structures/ versions, how do you want to
make sure that planning results are shared with other planners for overall planning
consistency?
A:
Q: 13) What kind of (key) figures do you hand over from one to the next planning
procedure?
A:
Q: 14) If the information structure is not used for reporting, the names of the standard key
figures can be changed individually within the planning type. What are the new names?
A:
A:
Q: 16) Do you want to use routings or rough cut planning profiles for capacity planning?
A:
Q: 17) Make sure that the planning hierarchy is consistent in each tree.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 18) How do you want to calculate the proportions of the master data in the planning
hierarchy?
A:
Q: 19) How often do you have to rework the planning hierarchy for the master data, and for
calculating the proportions?
A:
Q: 20) If you create the planning hierarchy automatically, which planning objects do you
want to exclude from the hierarchy when generating the master data by using a method?
A:
Q: 21) What are your planning objects (for example, product group, material, region)?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 26) Determine the planning time fence (2): how many periods should be visible/planned
in past time?
A:
Q: 27) Determine the level and the object where you want to do resource planning, for
example, on product hierarchy level evaluation of production line capacity or transport
capacity on a product group level.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 33) Which kind of formulas do you require for your planning processes and on which
level should the calculation be carried out?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 37) What information do you want to calculate but not save in the infostructure?
A:
Q: 38) What information on actual data you want to see in the planning phase?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Q: 41) Which key figures should be visible, and which planned by each planner using the
corresponding planning type?
A:
Q: 42) Which key figures should be aggregated to a sum and/or average value, and which
key figures should not be aggregated at all?
A:
Q: 43) Which planning figures do you want to define for each of the planning procedures?
What are your objectives concerning optimization?
A:
A:
Q: 45) What are your goals when planning capacity in flexible planning?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 49) How often do you want to plan and how often do you need to maintain this plan?
A:
Q: 51) How do you want to maintain your available capacity (for example, by shift plan,
manually, by factory calendar)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 53) How do you want to organize the whole planning cycle in the time sequence?
A:
Q: 54) How do you want to launch new products (for example, when working with the
forecast tool, do you want to use the history of products that might behave similarly)?
A:
A:
Q: 56) What are the analyses based on the planning result compared to the analyses based
on actual data?
A:
A:
Q: 59) Do you want to plan components derived from the plan of finished materials (e.g.
attachments, spare parts)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 61) At which point(s) of time do you want to create capacity loads? Maintain this in the
time span periods in the rough cut planning profile.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How often are the results of Sales and Operations Planning transferred to Demand
Management, and how is this defined?
A:
Q: 2) Which strategies are used in the transfer of SOP results to Demand Management?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: - Direct transfer of sales plan material - Transfer sales plan material as a
proportion of a product group - Direct transfer master production schedule - Transfer master
production schedule as a proportion of a product group
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which planning strategies do you use to plan production quantities and dates?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) If you carry out planning by visual inspection, how is it supported and how do you
want the data to be transferred to SAP Retail?
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you want planned inward and outward movements (purchase orders, deliveries,
etc.) to be taken into consideration?
Explanation: Customizing the MRP type: external requirements Customizing the MRP type:
external requirements
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
2. Procurement
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How are purchase requisitions created in the case of stock material, material for direct
consumption, external services?
A:
Q: 2) Will you use a purchase requisition to trigger creation of for a contract or scheduling
agreement (Outline Agreement Request)?
A:
Q: 3) How many days does it take, typically, before a purchase requisition becomes
demand in a purchasing document given to a supplier? Please indicate processing time per
plant.
Explanation: This would be used by the system to calculate replenishment lead times.
Example : In plant A, within two days the purchasing department will convert a requisition for
widgets into a purchase order issued to a supoplier.Please indicate processing times per
plant.
A:
Explanation: Problematic if dynamic rounding profiles are used, because these only take
effect at the time of conversion into POs. You post-process the result, which is changed again
after the manual post-processing (via rounding profiles). (via rounding profiles).
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) What support (e.g. price simulation) does the buyer need in order to assign the
purchase requisition?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which sources of supply will you use for purchase requisitions? Are these sources of
supply internal and/or external to your company?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasing
department manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the department
manager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under what
circumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -
for external services
A:
Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?
A:
Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?
A:
2.1.2. Purchasing
2.1.2.1. Purchase Order Processing
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want the system to check whether the purchase price is within a predefined
tolerance in your system, compared with the material valuation price?
A:
Q: 3) Describe how the source of supply is determined for manually created purchase
requisitions!
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Specify the consumption categories for which you will procure external services and
material directly: Asset, cost center, production order, project, sales order, other (please
specify).
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Do you order material in a unit of measure that differs from the one used for
stockkeeping purposes?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you pay for material in a different unit of measure than the one that is shown in the
PO/and or used for stock putaway?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Are purchasing info records to be updated automatically with every purchase order?
Explanation: If updating is desired and you use rounding profiles in the case of stock
transport orders, after the first purchase order created the logistic data on the article is no
longer read for the rounding profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are
read! profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are read!
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) Do you wish to analyze/evaluate purchase transactions according to the reasons for
ordering?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Do you plan and enter freight costs in the PO? If yes, describe the basis of the costs.
Also indicate if any types of costs can be determined automatically (for example, freight costs
per piece, per unit of weight, as a percentage of the value).
A:
Q: 14) Do you want to prevent users from changing the account assignment of items in
purchasing documents for which they have no authorizations? If so, for which purchasing
documents?
A:
Q: 15) Do you sometimes order stock material directly for a cost center or another
consumption category?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 16) Do you have to declare your ordering activities to the authorities? If so, describe.
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow overdeliveries? If so, specify the percentage variance for the individual
materials/material types.
A:
Q: 18) On the occasion that a vendor sent you less than the quantity ordered, would you
ever want this shortfall to be considered an under delivery, with no further deliveries
expected? Please list the values for each material/material group.
Explanation: In case of exceeding this value, it will be a partial delivery. In case the value
stayed below, it will be an under delivery
A:
Q: 19) Can the materials you purchase be subject to different tax types? (For example,
based upon the material purchased, based upon the plant for which the material is
purchased, etc)? o
A:
Q: 20) Do your POs issued to vendors contain specific transport or packing instructions? Is
vendors' compliance with the transport and packing instructions to be recorded when the
goods are received ?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Define the movement types for which this should be allowed.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will contract release orders be created in R/3 manually, with reference to purchase
requisitions, and/or automatically? (For more details, refer to the Source Administration
Scenario.) - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by the
purchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved by
the President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approval
process applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services
A:
Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3
regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.
Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for release
procedure
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?
A:
Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notification
have been received?
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.
A:
Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)
on your order form?
A:
A:
2.1.2.5. Scheduling Agreement Delivery Schedule
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How do you wish to synchronize (monitor) the delivery schedules/SA releases with
respect to the quantities delivered?
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreement
releases via the Internet?
Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace is
installed in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In the
release creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internet
release.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How many days after the due delivery date will you send messages to your vendors
urging delivery of the overdue goods?
A:
Q: 2) Should this deadline monitoring vary for different materials or articles? If so, please
explain.
A:
Q: 3) Will you send out reminders regarding outstanding vendor confirmations if the due
date is exceeded? Acknowledgment deadline is exceeded?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: What kinds of purchasing document output (for example printouts, fax
messages, EDI) will you send to your vendors? 1) Complete purchasing document 2) Change
notice (When a purchasing document which has already been outputted and sent to a vendor
is changed, you can only output the changes instead of the entire document) 3) Reminders
(send before the due date) 4) Urging letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) 4) Urging
letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) If you use order confirmations and/or shipping
notifications: 5) Urging Letter for Outstanding Acknowledgement or Shipping notification
notification If you use scheduling agreements: 6) Rolling Delivery Schedule 7) Urging Letter
Related to Rolling Delivery schedules
A:
Q: 5) Will you send urging messages (expediters) to your vendors in the case of overdue
deliveries. If so, how many days after the due date will you do this?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 6) How are reminders and urging letters (expediters) to be sent to your vendors?
A:
2.1.2.8. Inbound EDI Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoc
type is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.
A:
Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?
A:
Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.
Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way you
use them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to add
more fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments re
function modules in R/3.
A:
Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?
A:
Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3
and your subsystem?
A:
Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, look
under http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -
R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and the
desired send time.
A:
Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)
and the desired processing time
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Once you have issued a purchasing document to a vendor, do you want to track
"confirmations" your vendor may return to you regarding the order?
Explanation: Examples: 1) Order acknowledgements which confirm the order dates and
quantities. 2) Shipping notifications, informing you that the vendor has shipped the goods
(you can have goods receipts with reference to shipping notifications). 3) Any other - please
describe.
A:
Q: 3) What do you do if the order acknowledgment contains quantity and/or delivery date
variances vis à vis the purchase order or a previous acknowledgment?
A:
Q: 4) Which type of vendor confirmation do you need and at which time intervals? Which
events should trigger a confirmation?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
2.1.3. Transportation
2.1.3.1. Message Transmission for Transport Documents
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
2.1.3.2. Transportation Planning and Processing
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point in
time (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?
A:
Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?
A:
Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?
A:
Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?
A:
Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?
A:
Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of your
external carrier?
A:
Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Will you maintain specific material reservations (for sales, for production) for your
stock materials?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) How long after the reservation date are open reservations canceled?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) The material stock balances shown in your legacy system are to be transferred to the
R/3 System. Will the stocks be valuated at the prices specified in the R/3 e total value of the
former system be taken over?
A:
Q: 2) If you do not use the R/3 Purchasing functionality, describe the process of receiving
goods from a vendor.
A:
Q: 3) If you do not use production orders of the R/3 System, describe the process of
receiving goods from production.
A:
Q: 4) Should the person who posts a goods receipt be able to use a different account
assignment than the one specified via the automatic account determination process?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?
A:
Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order
considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?
A:
Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"
at a different location than those posted to normal stock?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!
A:
Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you order
in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.
A:
Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be
used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?
A:
Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping
instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person who
enters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?
A:
Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enter
the goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the
inspection has been carried out?
Explanation: QM module
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time
of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.
A:
A:
Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?
Which information should be included in the printout?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Define the movement types for which this should be allowed.
A:
Questions:
A:
2.1.6. Warehouse/Stores
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you have storage locations, which are not relevant for Warehouse Management ?
A:
Q: 2) Will you use storage locations for more than one plant? Name these storage locations
and the relevant plants.
A:
A:
Q: 4) Are you using external Warehouse control systems / subsystems? Do you plan to
connect this system with the R/3 ?
A:
Q: 5) Which system should determine the storage bins for stock placement / removement ?
A:
Q: 6) For removals and batch management, which system should determine the batch?
A:
A:
Q: 8) How does your automated storage and retrieval system communicate to the legacy
system? Explain or provide a design drawing.
A:
A:
Q: 10) Do you want to control whether goods in the goods receipt zone are displayed in the
availability check?
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they in
unrestricted-use stock?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage
(putaway).
A:
Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?
Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer order
form, sticker, etc.)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in the
goods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post to
stock - move to inspection area?
Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or
remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area
- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is
created?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.
A:
Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to place
the materials? Is this done manually?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins) for your stock materials?
A:
Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?
A:
Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shipping
point, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?
A:
Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
2.1.6.3. Confirmation
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stock
purge?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) on
the defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?
A:
Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined that
they are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) According to which rules do you effect automatic settlement with regard to goods
receipts?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoc
type is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.
A:
Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?
A:
Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.
Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way you
use them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to add
more fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments re
function modules in R/3.
A:
Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?
A:
Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3
and your subsystem?
A:
Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, look
under http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -
R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714
A:
Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and the
desired send time.
A:
Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)
and the desired processing time
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you reduce the amount of your vendors' invoices automatically in the event of
variances?
A:
A:
Q: 3) List the types of tax that are generally applicable and should therefore be
automatically suggested in the standard system when an invoice is entered.
A:
Q: 4) If there are different types of tax, can groups of these tax types occur together under
certain circumstances?
A:
Q: 5) If you are implementing QM, do you always require that goods receipts have passed
QM inspection before being paid ?
A:
Explanation: Notes: Delivery costs are additional costs such as for express delivery.
A:
Q: 7) Do you sometimes have to change the account assignment for a certain purchase
order at the time of invoice verification?
A:
A:
Q: 9) Which other messages do you want to send to your vendors or to people within your
organization with respect to the invoice receipt?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 10) Is a goods receipt always necessary for invoice verification purposes? If so, do you
allow reversal of the goods issue after the invoice has been posted? has been entered?
A:
A:
Q: 12) Do you wish to notify Purchasing if the invoice price varies from the purchase order
price?
A:
Q: 13) Specific to Brazil: Describe the Nota Fiscal process including special situations such
as future delivery, importation, returnable transport packing, and freight.
A:
Q: 14) Do you use tax jurisdiction codes? Specify the codes used.
A:
Q: 15) Do you receive invoices with a large volume of data for which no checking is
necessary?
A:
Q: 16) Do you receive invoices relating to transactions that are not administered in the
system?
A:
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Describe the information flow between Purchasing, Logistics and Invoice Verification
in the case of errors.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice when
the number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value for
X.
A:
Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due to
variances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.
Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantity
difference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) you
tolerate without warning or error messages?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What is
the threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) without
reference to a purchase order?
A:
Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price and
the invoice price? How is this person to be notified?
A:
A:
Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?
le manager)
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How are purchase requisitions created in the case of stock material, material for direct
consumption, external services?
A:
Q: 2) Will you use a purchase requisition to trigger creation of for a contract or scheduling
agreement (Outline Agreement Request)?
A:
Q: 3) How many days does it take, typically, before a purchase requisition becomes
demand in a purchasing document given to a supplier? Please indicate processing time per
plant.
Explanation: This would be used by the system to calculate replenishment lead times.
Example : In plant A, within two days the purchasing department will convert a requisition for
widgets into a purchase order issued to a supoplier.Please indicate processing times per
plant.
A:
Explanation: Problematic if dynamic rounding profiles are used, because these only take
effect at the time of conversion into POs. You post-process the result, which is changed again
after the manual post-processing (via rounding profiles). (via rounding profiles).
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) What support (e.g. price simulation) does the buyer need in order to assign the
purchase requisition?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which sources of supply will you use for purchase requisitions? Are these sources of
supply internal and/or external to your company?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasing
department manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the department
manager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under what
circumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -
for external services
A:
Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?
A:
Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?
A:
2.2.2. Purchasing
2.2.2.1. Purchase Order Processing
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want the system to check whether the purchase price is within a predefined
tolerance in your system, compared with the material valuation price?
A:
Q: 3) Describe how the source of supply is determined for manually created purchase
requisitions!
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 4) Specify the consumption categories for which you will procure external services and
material directly: Asset, cost center, production order, project, sales order, other (please
specify).
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Do you order material in a unit of measure that differs from the one used for
stockkeeping purposes?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you pay for material in a different unit of measure than the one that is shown in the
PO/and or used for stock putaway?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Are purchasing info records to be updated automatically with every purchase order?
Explanation: If updating is desired and you use rounding profiles in the case of stock
transport orders, after the first purchase order created the logistic data on the article is no
longer read for the rounding profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are
read! profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are read!
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) Do you wish to analyze/evaluate purchase transactions according to the reasons for
ordering?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Do you plan and enter freight costs in the PO? If yes, describe the basis of the costs.
Also indicate if any types of costs can be determined automatically (for example, freight costs
per piece, per unit of weight, as a percentage of the value).
A:
Q: 14) Do you want to prevent users from changing the account assignment of items in
purchasing documents for which they have no authorizations? If so, for which purchasing
documents?
A:
Q: 15) Do you sometimes order stock material directly for a cost center or another
consumption category?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 16) Do you have to declare your ordering activities to the authorities? If so, describe.
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow overdeliveries? If so, specify the percentage variance for the individual
materials/material types.
A:
Q: 18) On the occasion that a vendor sent you less than the quantity ordered, would you
ever want this shortfall to be considered an under delivery, with no further deliveries
expected? Please list the values for each material/material group.
Explanation: In case of exceeding this value, it will be a partial delivery. In case the value
stayed below, it will be an under delivery
A:
Q: 19) Can the materials you purchase be subject to different tax types? (For example,
based upon the material purchased, based upon the plant for which the material is
purchased, etc)? o
A:
Q: 20) Do your POs issued to vendors contain specific transport or packing instructions? Is
vendors' compliance with the transport and packing instructions to be recorded when the
goods are received ?
A:
Explanation: Define the movement types for which this should be allowed.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will contract release orders be created in R/3 manually, with reference to purchase
requisitions, and/or automatically? (For more details, refer to the Source Administration
Scenario.) - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by the
purchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved by
the President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approval
process applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services
A:
Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3
regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.
Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for release
procedure
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notification
have been received?
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.
A:
Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)
on your order form?
A:
A:
2.2.2.5. Scheduling Agreement Delivery Schedule
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How do you wish to synchronize (monitor) the delivery schedules/SA releases with
respect to the quantities delivered?
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreement
releases via the Internet?
Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace is
installed in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In the
release creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internet
release.
A:
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How many days after the due delivery date will you send messages to your vendors
urging delivery of the overdue goods?
A:
Q: 2) Should this deadline monitoring vary for different materials or articles? If so, please
explain.
A:
Q: 3) Will you send out reminders regarding outstanding vendor confirmations if the due
date is exceeded? Acknowledgment deadline is exceeded?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: What kinds of purchasing document output (for example printouts, fax
messages, EDI) will you send to your vendors? 1) Complete purchasing document 2) Change
notice (When a purchasing document which has already been outputted and sent to a vendor
is changed, you can only output the changes instead of the entire document) 3) Reminders
(send before the due date) 4) Urging letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) 4) Urging
letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) If you use order confirmations and/or shipping
notifications: 5) Urging Letter for Outstanding Acknowledgement or Shipping notification
notification If you use scheduling agreements: 6) Rolling Delivery Schedule 7) Urging Letter
Related to Rolling Delivery schedules
A:
Q: 5) Will you send urging messages (expediters) to your vendors in the case of overdue
deliveries. If so, how many days after the due date will you do this?
A:
Q: 6) How are reminders and urging letters (expediters) to be sent to your vendors?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
2.2.2.8. Inbound EDI Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoc
type is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.
A:
Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?
A:
Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.
Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way you
use them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to add
more fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments re
function modules in R/3.
A:
Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?
A:
Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3
and your subsystem?
A:
Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, look
under http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -
R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714
A:
Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and the
desired send time.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)
and the desired processing time
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Once you have issued a purchasing document to a vendor, do you want to track
"confirmations" your vendor may return to you regarding the order?
Explanation: Examples: 1) Order acknowledgements which confirm the order dates and
quantities. 2) Shipping notifications, informing you that the vendor has shipped the goods
(you can have goods receipts with reference to shipping notifications). 3) Any other - please
describe.
A:
Q: 3) What do you do if the order acknowledgment contains quantity and/or delivery date
variances vis à vis the purchase order or a previous acknowledgment?
A:
Q: 4) Which type of vendor confirmation do you need and at which time intervals? Which
events should trigger a confirmation?
A:
Questions:
A:
2.2.3. Transportation
2.2.3.1. Message Transmission for Transport Documents
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
2.2.3.2. Transportation Planning and Processing
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point in
time (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?
A:
Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?
A:
Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?
A:
Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?
A:
Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?
A:
Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of your
external carrier?
A:
Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How will the consumption of these parts be entered and who will post the return in the
system?
A:
Q: 3) How do you record which materials were received specifically for a work order?
A:
Q: 4) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what information
do they contain?
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Q: 22) How do you allocate merchandise which is in short supply (delivery priorities)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order
considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?
A:
Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"
at a different location than those posted to normal stock?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!
A:
Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you order
in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.
A:
Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be
used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?
A:
Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping
instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person who
enters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enter
the goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the
inspection has been carried out?
Explanation: QM module
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time
of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.
A:
A:
Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?
Which information should be included in the printout?
A:
Questions:
A:
2.2.6. Warehouse/Stores
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you have vendors with several/different ordering addresses, payees, carriers, and
so on? If so, what do these depend on (assortment, supply region)?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Are you using external Warehouse control systems / subsystems? Do you plan to
connect this system with the R/3 ?
A:
Q: 5) Which system should determine the storage bins for stock placement / removement ?
A:
Q: 6) For removals and batch management, which system should determine the batch?
A:
A:
Q: 8) How does your automated storage and retrieval system communicate to the legacy
system? Explain or provide a design drawing.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 2) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Q: 3) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they in
unrestricted-use stock?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage
(putaway).
A:
Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?
Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer order
form, sticker, etc.)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in the
goods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post to
stock - move to inspection area?
Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or
remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area
- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is
created?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.
A:
Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to place
the materials? Is this done manually?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins) for your stock materials?
A:
Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?
A:
Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shipping
point, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?
A:
Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
2.2.6.4. Confirmation
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stock
purge?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) on
the defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?
A:
Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined that
they are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) According to which rules do you effect automatic settlement with regard to goods
receipts?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoc
type is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.
A:
Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?
A:
Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way you
use them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to add
more fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments re
function modules in R/3.
A:
Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?
A:
Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3
and your subsystem?
A:
Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, look
under http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -
R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714
A:
Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and the
desired send time.
A:
Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)
and the desired processing time
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you reduce the amount of your vendors' invoices automatically in the event of
variances?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you have vendors who create one invoice for a delivery period?
A:
Q: 5) Do you receive mixed invoices (credit and debit items in the same document)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 7) List the types of tax that are generally applicable and should therefore be
automatically suggested in the standard system when an invoice is entered.
A:
Q: 8) If there are different types of tax, can groups of these tax types occur together under
certain circumstances?
A:
Q: 9) If you are implementing QM, do you always require that goods receipts have passed
QM inspection before being paid ?
A:
Explanation: Notes: Delivery costs are additional costs such as for express delivery.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 11) Do you sometimes have to change the account assignment for a certain purchase
order at the time of invoice verification?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Which other messages do you want to send to your vendors or to people within your
organization with respect to the invoice receipt?
A:
Q: 14) Is a goods receipt always necessary for invoice verification purposes? If so, do you
allow reversal of the goods issue after the invoice has been posted? has been entered?
A:
A:
Q: 16) Do you wish to notify Purchasing if the invoice price varies from the purchase order
price?
A:
Q: 17) Specific to Brazil: Describe the Nota Fiscal process including special situations such
as future delivery, importation, returnable transport packing, and freight.
A:
Q: 18) Do you use tax jurisdiction codes? Specify the codes used.
A:
Q: 19) Do you receive invoices with a large volume of data for which no checking is
necessary?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 20) Do you receive invoices relating to transactions that are not administered in the
system?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Describe the information flow between Purchasing, Logistics and Invoice Verification
in the case of errors.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice when
the number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value for
X.
A:
Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due to
variances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.
Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantity
difference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) you
tolerate without warning or error messages?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What is
the threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) without
reference to a purchase order?
A:
Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price and
the invoice price? How is this person to be notified?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?
le manager)
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How are purchase requisitions created in the case of stock material, material for direct
consumption, external services?
A:
Q: 2) Will you use a purchase requisition to trigger creation of for a contract or scheduling
agreement (Outline Agreement Request)?
A:
Q: 3) How many days does it take, typically, before a purchase requisition becomes
demand in a purchasing document given to a supplier? Please indicate processing time per
plant.
Explanation: This would be used by the system to calculate replenishment lead times.
Example : In plant A, within two days the purchasing department will convert a requisition for
widgets into a purchase order issued to a supoplier.Please indicate processing times per
plant.
A:
Explanation: Problematic if dynamic rounding profiles are used, because these only take
effect at the time of conversion into POs. You post-process the result, which is changed again
after the manual post-processing (via rounding profiles). (via rounding profiles).
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 3) What support (e.g. price simulation) does the buyer need in order to assign the
purchase requisition?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which sources of supply will you use for purchase requisitions? Are these sources of
supply internal and/or external to your company?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasing
department manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the department
manager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under what
circumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -
for external services
A:
Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?
A:
Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?
A:
2.3.2. Purchasing
2.3.2.1. Purchase Order Processing
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want the system to check whether the purchase price is within a predefined
tolerance in your system, compared with the material valuation price?
A:
Q: 3) Describe how the source of supply is determined for manually created purchase
requisitions!
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you order material in a unit of measure that differs from the one used for
stockkeeping purposes?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you pay for material in a different unit of measure than the one that is shown in the
PO/and or used for stock putaway?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Are purchasing info records to be updated automatically with every purchase order?
Explanation: If updating is desired and you use rounding profiles in the case of stock
transport orders, after the first purchase order created the logistic data on the article is no
longer read for the rounding profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are
read! profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are read!
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 10) Do you wish to analyze/evaluate purchase transactions according to the reasons for
ordering?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 11) Do you plan and enter freight costs in the PO? If yes, describe the basis of the costs.
Also indicate if any types of costs can be determined automatically (for example, freight costs
per piece, per unit of weight, as a percentage of the value).
A:
Q: 12) Do you want to prevent users from changing the account assignment of items in
purchasing documents for which they have no authorizations? If so, for which purchasing
documents?
A:
Q: 13) Do you sometimes order stock material directly for a cost center or another
consumption category?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) Do you have to declare your ordering activities to the authorities? If so, describe.
A:
Q: 15) Do you allow overdeliveries? If so, specify the percentage variance for the individual
materials/material types.
A:
Q: 16) On the occasion that a vendor sent you less than the quantity ordered, would you
ever want this shortfall to be considered an under delivery, with no further deliveries
expected? Please list the values for each material/material group.
Explanation: In case of exceeding this value, it will be a partial delivery. In case the value
stayed below, it will be an under delivery
A:
Q: 17) Can the materials you purchase be subject to different tax types? (For example,
based upon the material purchased, based upon the plant for which the material is
purchased, etc)? o
A:
Q: 18) Do your POs issued to vendors contain specific transport or packing instructions? Is
vendors' compliance with the transport and packing instructions to be recorded when the
goods are received ?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Will contract release orders be created in R/3 manually, with reference to purchase
requisitions, and/or automatically? (For more details, refer to the Source Administration
Scenario.) - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by the
purchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved by
the President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approval
process applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services
A:
Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3
regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.
Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for release
procedure
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?
A:
Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notification
have been received?
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.
A:
Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)
on your order form?
A:
A:
2.3.2.5. Scheduling Agreement Delivery Schedule
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How do you wish to synchronize (monitor) the delivery schedules/SA releases with
respect to the quantities delivered?
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreement
releases via the Internet?
Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace is
installed in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In the
release creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internet
release.
A:
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How many days after the due delivery date will you send messages to your vendors
urging delivery of the overdue goods?
A:
Q: 2) Should this deadline monitoring vary for different materials or articles? If so, please
explain.
A:
Q: 3) Will you send out reminders regarding outstanding vendor confirmations if the due
date is exceeded? Acknowledgment deadline is exceeded?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: What kinds of purchasing document output (for example printouts, fax
messages, EDI) will you send to your vendors? 1) Complete purchasing document 2) Change
notice (When a purchasing document which has already been outputted and sent to a vendor
is changed, you can only output the changes instead of the entire document) 3) Reminders
(send before the due date) 4) Urging letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) 4) Urging
letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) If you use order confirmations and/or shipping
notifications: 5) Urging Letter for Outstanding Acknowledgement or Shipping notification
notification If you use scheduling agreements: 6) Rolling Delivery Schedule 7) Urging Letter
Related to Rolling Delivery schedules
A:
Q: 5) Will you send urging messages (expediters) to your vendors in the case of overdue
deliveries. If so, how many days after the due date will you do this?
A:
Q: 6) How are reminders and urging letters (expediters) to be sent to your vendors?
A:
2.3.2.8. Inbound EDI Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoc
type is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?
A:
Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.
Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way you
use them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to add
more fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments re
function modules in R/3.
A:
Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?
A:
Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3
and your subsystem?
A:
Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, look
under http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -
R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714
A:
Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and the
desired send time.
A:
Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)
and the desired processing time
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Once you have issued a purchasing document to a vendor, do you want to track
"confirmations" your vendor may return to you regarding the order?
Explanation: Examples: 1) Order acknowledgements which confirm the order dates and
quantities. 2) Shipping notifications, informing you that the vendor has shipped the goods
(you can have goods receipts with reference to shipping notifications). 3) Any other - please
describe.
A:
Q: 3) What do you do if the order acknowledgment contains quantity and/or delivery date
variances vis à vis the purchase order or a previous acknowledgment?
A:
Q: 4) Which type of vendor confirmation do you need and at which time intervals? Which
events should trigger a confirmation?
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?
A:
Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order
considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?
A:
Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"
at a different location than those posted to normal stock?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!
A:
Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you order
in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.
A:
Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be
used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?
A:
Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping
instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person who
enters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?
A:
Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enter
the goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the
inspection has been carried out?
Explanation: QM module
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time
of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.
A:
A:
Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?
Which information should be included in the printout?
A:
2.3.4. Warehouse/Stores
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you have storage locations, which are not relevant for Warehouse Management ?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Are you using external Warehouse control systems / subsystems? Do you plan to
connect this system with the R/3 ?
A:
Q: 5) Which system should determine the storage bins for stock placement / removement ?
A:
Q: 6) For removals and batch management, which system should determine the batch?
A:
A:
Q: 8) How does your automated storage and retrieval system communicate to the legacy
system? Explain or provide a design drawing.
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they in
unrestricted-use stock?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage
(putaway).
A:
Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?
Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer order
form, sticker, etc.)?
A:
Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in the
goods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post to
stock - move to inspection area?
Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or
remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area
- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is
created?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.
A:
Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to place
the materials? Is this done manually?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins) for your stock materials?
A:
Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?
A:
Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shipping
point, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?
A:
Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
2.3.4.3. Confirmation
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stock
purge?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) on
the defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?
A:
Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined that
they are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.
A:
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice when
the number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value for
X.
A:
Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due to
variances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.
Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantity
difference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) you
tolerate without warning or error messages?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What is
the threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) without
reference to a purchase order?
A:
Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price and
the invoice price? How is this person to be notified?
A:
A:
Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?
le manager)
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) How are purchase requisitions created in the case of stock material, material for direct
consumption, external services?
A:
Q: 2) Will you use a purchase requisition to trigger creation of for a contract or scheduling
agreement (Outline Agreement Request)?
A:
Q: 3) How many days does it take, typically, before a purchase requisition becomes
demand in a purchasing document given to a supplier? Please indicate processing time per
plant.
Explanation: This would be used by the system to calculate replenishment lead times.
Example : In plant A, within two days the purchasing department will convert a requisition for
widgets into a purchase order issued to a supoplier.Please indicate processing times per
plant.
A:
Explanation: Problematic if dynamic rounding profiles are used, because these only take
effect at the time of conversion into POs. You post-process the result, which is changed again
after the manual post-processing (via rounding profiles). (via rounding profiles).
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) What support (e.g. price simulation) does the buyer need in order to assign the
purchase requisition?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which sources of supply will you use for purchase requisitions? Are these sources of
supply internal and/or external to your company?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasing
department manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the department
manager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under what
circumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -
for external services
A:
Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?
A:
Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?
A:
2.4.2. Purchasing
2.4.2.1. Purchase Order Processing
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want the system to check whether the purchase price is within a predefined
tolerance in your system, compared with the material valuation price?
A:
Q: 3) Describe how the source of supply is determined for manually created purchase
requisitions!
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Specify the consumption categories for which you will procure external services and
material directly: Asset, cost center, production order, project, sales order, other (please
specify).
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Do you order material in a unit of measure that differs from the one used for
stockkeeping purposes?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you pay for material in a different unit of measure than the one that is shown in the
PO/and or used for stock putaway?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Are purchasing info records to be updated automatically with every purchase order?
Explanation: If updating is desired and you use rounding profiles in the case of stock
transport orders, after the first purchase order created the logistic data on the article is no
longer read for the rounding profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are
read! profile. Instead the newly created purchasing info records are read!
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) Do you wish to analyze/evaluate purchase transactions according to the reasons for
ordering?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Do you plan and enter freight costs in the PO? If yes, describe the basis of the costs.
Also indicate if any types of costs can be determined automatically (for example, freight costs
per piece, per unit of weight, as a percentage of the value).
A:
Q: 14) Do you want to prevent users from changing the account assignment of items in
purchasing documents for which they have no authorizations? If so, for which purchasing
documents?
A:
Q: 15) Do you sometimes order stock material directly for a cost center or another
consumption category?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 16) Do you have to declare your ordering activities to the authorities? If so, describe.
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow overdeliveries? If so, specify the percentage variance for the individual
materials/material types.
A:
Q: 18) On the occasion that a vendor sent you less than the quantity ordered, would you
ever want this shortfall to be considered an under delivery, with no further deliveries
expected? Please list the values for each material/material group.
Explanation: In case of exceeding this value, it will be a partial delivery. In case the value
stayed below, it will be an under delivery
A:
Q: 19) Can the materials you purchase be subject to different tax types? (For example,
based upon the material purchased, based upon the plant for which the material is
purchased, etc)? o
A:
Q: 20) Do your POs issued to vendors contain specific transport or packing instructions? Is
vendors' compliance with the transport and packing instructions to be recorded when the
goods are received ?
A:
Explanation: Define the movement types for which this should be allowed.
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by the
purchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved by
the President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approval
process applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services
A:
Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3
regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.
Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for release
procedure
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?
A:
Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notification
have been received?
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.
A:
Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)
on your order form?
A:
A:
2.4.2.4. Scheduling Agreement Delivery Schedule
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How do you wish to synchronize (monitor) the delivery schedules/SA releases with
respect to the quantities delivered?
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreement
releases via the Internet?
Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace is
installed in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In the
release creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internet
release.
A:
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How many days after the due delivery date will you send messages to your vendors
urging delivery of the overdue goods?
A:
Q: 2) Should this deadline monitoring vary for different materials or articles? If so, please
explain.
A:
Q: 3) Will you send out reminders regarding outstanding vendor confirmations if the due
date is exceeded? Acknowledgment deadline is exceeded?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: What kinds of purchasing document output (for example printouts, fax
messages, EDI) will you send to your vendors? 1) Complete purchasing document 2) Change
notice (When a purchasing document which has already been outputted and sent to a vendor
is changed, you can only output the changes instead of the entire document) 3) Reminders
(send before the due date) 4) Urging letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) 4) Urging
letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) If you use order confirmations and/or shipping
notifications: 5) Urging Letter for Outstanding Acknowledgement or Shipping notification
notification If you use scheduling agreements: 6) Rolling Delivery Schedule 7) Urging Letter
Related to Rolling Delivery schedules
A:
Q: 5) Will you send urging messages (expediters) to your vendors in the case of overdue
deliveries. If so, how many days after the due date will you do this?
A:
Q: 6) How are reminders and urging letters (expediters) to be sent to your vendors?
A:
2.4.2.7. Inbound EDI Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoc
type is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?
A:
Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.
Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way you
use them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to add
more fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments re
function modules in R/3.
A:
Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?
A:
Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3
and your subsystem?
A:
Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, look
under http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -
R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714
A:
Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and the
desired send time.
A:
Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)
and the desired processing time
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Once you have issued a purchasing document to a vendor, do you want to track
"confirmations" your vendor may return to you regarding the order?
Explanation: Examples: 1) Order acknowledgements which confirm the order dates and
quantities. 2) Shipping notifications, informing you that the vendor has shipped the goods
(you can have goods receipts with reference to shipping notifications). 3) Any other - please
describe.
A:
Q: 3) What do you do if the order acknowledgment contains quantity and/or delivery date
variances vis à vis the purchase order or a previous acknowledgment?
A:
Q: 4) Which type of vendor confirmation do you need and at which time intervals? Which
events should trigger a confirmation?
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) The material stock balances shown in your legacy system are to be transferred to the
R/3 System. Will the stocks be valuated at the prices specified in the R/3 e total value of the
former system be taken over?
A:
Q: 2) If you do not use the R/3 Purchasing functionality, describe the process of receiving
goods from a vendor.
A:
Q: 3) If you do not use production orders of the R/3 System, describe the process of
receiving goods from production.
A:
Q: 4) Should the person who posts a goods receipt be able to use a different account
assignment than the one specified via the automatic account determination process?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?
A:
Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order
considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?
A:
Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"
at a different location than those posted to normal stock?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you order
in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.
A:
Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be
used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?
A:
Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping
instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person who
enters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?
A:
Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enter
the goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the
inspection has been carried out?
Explanation: QM module
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time
of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.
A:
A:
Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?
Which information should be included in the printout?
A:
2.4.4. Warehouse/Stores
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you have storage locations, which are not relevant for Warehouse Management ?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Are you using external Warehouse control systems / subsystems? Do you plan to
connect this system with the R/3 ?
A:
Q: 5) Which system should determine the storage bins for stock placement / removement ?
A:
Q: 6) For removals and batch management, which system should determine the batch?
A:
A:
Q: 8) How does your automated storage and retrieval system communicate to the legacy
system? Explain or provide a design drawing.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they in
unrestricted-use stock?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage
(putaway).
A:
Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?
Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer order
form, sticker, etc.)?
A:
Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in the
goods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post to
stock - move to inspection area?
Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or
remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area
- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is
created?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.
A:
Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to place
the materials? Is this done manually?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins) for your stock materials?
A:
Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shipping
point, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?
A:
Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stock
purge?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) on
the defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?
A:
Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined that
they are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) According to which rules do you effect automatic settlement with regard to goods
receipts?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you reduce the amount of your vendors' invoices automatically in the event of
variances?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you have vendors who create one invoice for a delivery period?
A:
Q: 5) Do you receive mixed invoices (credit and debit items in the same document)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 7) List the types of tax that are generally applicable and should therefore be
automatically suggested in the standard system when an invoice is entered.
A:
Q: 8) If there are different types of tax, can groups of these tax types occur together under
certain circumstances?
A:
Q: 9) If you are implementing QM, do you always require that goods receipts have passed
QM inspection before being paid ?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Explanation: Notes: Delivery costs are additional costs such as for express delivery.
A:
Q: 11) Do you sometimes have to change the account assignment for a certain purchase
order at the time of invoice verification?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Which other messages do you want to send to your vendors or to people within your
organization with respect to the invoice receipt?
A:
Q: 14) Is a goods receipt always necessary for invoice verification purposes? If so, do you
allow reversal of the goods issue after the invoice has been posted? has been entered?
A:
A:
Q: 16) Do you wish to notify Purchasing if the invoice price varies from the purchase order
price?
A:
Q: 17) Specific to Brazil: Describe the Nota Fiscal process including special situations such
as future delivery, importation, returnable transport packing, and freight.
A:
Q: 18) Do you use tax jurisdiction codes? Specify the codes used.
A:
Q: 19) Do you receive invoices with a large volume of data for which no checking is
necessary?
A:
Q: 20) Do you receive invoices relating to transactions that are not administered in the
system?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Describe the information flow between Purchasing, Logistics and Invoice Verification
in the case of errors.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice when
the number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value for
X.
A:
Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due to
variances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.
Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantity
difference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) you
tolerate without warning or error messages?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What is
the threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) without
reference to a purchase order?
A:
Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price and
the invoice price? How is this person to be notified?
A:
A:
Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?
le manager)
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoc
type is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.
A:
Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?
A:
Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.
Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way you
use them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to add
more fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments re
function modules in R/3.
A:
Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3
and your subsystem?
A:
Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, look
under http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -
R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714
A:
Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and the
desired send time.
A:
Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)
and the desired processing time
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what information
do they contain?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice when
the number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value for
X.
A:
Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due to
variances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.
Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantity
difference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) you
tolerate without warning or error messages?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What is
the threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) without
reference to a purchase order?
A:
Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price and
the invoice price? How is this person to be notified?
A:
A:
Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?
le manager)
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you generally request several vendors to submit prices, terms and conditions in
the form of a tender/bid/quotation?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Can an article be procured from several vendors? If so, is this the rule or an
exception? (Or specify percentage.)
A:
Q: 4) Do you carry out requirements planning for structured articles (e.g. prepack, display)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) How do you determine the requirement quantities at header level in the case of
structured articles?
A:
Q: 6) Do you exclude articles from requirements planning? If so, which (e.g. import,
seasonal, promotion, etc.)?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by the
purchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved by
the President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approval
process applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3
regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.
Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for release
procedure
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.
A:
Q: 2) Will you send rejection letters to unsuccessful bidders? Indicate how such letters are
to be transmitted to the vendor.
A:
2.6.1.4. Vendor Quotation Processing
Questions:
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.
A:
Q: 2) Will you send rejection letters to unsuccessful bidders? Indicate how such letters are
to be transmitted to the vendor.
A:
2.6.2. Outline Purchase Agreements
2.6.2.1. Contract Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you use contracts in R/3? If so, what will you use contracts for (e.g. stock
materials, consumable materials, external services)?
A:
Q: 2) Which types of contract do you need (e.g. value contracts, quantity contracts)?
A:
Q: 3) Are the contracts to be valid for: - more than one plant - more than one company
code?
A:
Q: 4) Do you also allow a consumption account in the case of contracts for stock materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you use scheduling agreements to procure materials from external suppliers or
supplying plants? If so, which types of scheduling agreement will you use? Should these
scheduling agreements be maintained centrally?
Explanation: Will you maintain scheduling agreements in SAP with either an external vendor
or a plant supplying the materials? If yes, - what type of scheduling agreements are you
maintaining? (for example, standard, subcontracting, consignment, stock transfer. - will any of
these scheduling agreements reference a centrally maintained contract?
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to reconcile the quantity requested and the quantity actually delivered
with your vendor (monitoring function)? If so, how are the lines of the scheduling agreement
delivery schedule generated: manually or via materials planning (MRP)? M
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) Do you need release documents (e.g., call-offs) and master conditions to manage
your scheduling lines? If yes, are any of these JIT delivery schedules?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreement
releases via the Internet?
Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace is
installed in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In the
release creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internet
release.
A:
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by the
purchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved by
the President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approval
process applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services
A:
Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3
regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.
Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for release
procedure
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.
A:
Q: 3) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)
on your order form?
A:
A:
A:
2.6.2.5. Transmission of Scheduling Agreements
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) In your company, who is responsible for the receipt or creation of quality notifications?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 6) List the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information you
require when creating the notification. Add other business partners, if necessary.
A:
Q: 7) How do you describe the problem? Do you use a verbal description or standard
codes?
A:
Q: 8) Do you want to attach electronic documents (for example, inspection reports) to the
notification?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: An incorrect assignment is usually the result of a problem with the
documentation.
A:
Q: 10) Do you have ad-hoc tasks that you always carry out for different notification types or
priorities? If so, describe these tasks.
A:
Q: 11) Do you want the person or coordinator responsible for a task to be notified
automatically by the system?
A:
Explanation: Set the "approval required" indicator for the required notification type (IMG
activity: OLQN_CL). An additional notification status "Submit for approval" will be created. be
created.
A:
Q: 13) How do you want to structure the layout of your notification with regard to the
problem description, execution, items, tasks, activities?
A:
Q: 14) Do you record costs arising from complaints? Describe how you record these.
Explanation: Costs, for example, for wages, material, telephone costs, travel expenses etc.
A:
Q: 15) Do you want to create and activate the QM order, based on the notification? Where
are these costs to be settled?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 16) How many notifications do you receive each day or each year?
A:
Q: 17) Do you record the performed activities that solved the customer problem in a
standardized way (for example, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possible
solutions for a problem?
A:
Q: 18) How is a quality notification processed in your company? Describe the process for
external or internal notifications.
A:
Q: 19) Do you allow your customers to create complaints in your system using the Internet?
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point in
time (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?
A:
Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?
A:
Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?
A:
Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?
A:
Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?
A:
Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of your
external carrier?
A:
Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
2.7.3. Warehouse
2.7.3.1. Stock Removal Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 2) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Q: 3) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
2.7.3.3. Confirmation
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
2.7.4. Shipping
2.7.4.1. Message Transmission for Deliveries
Questions:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
A:
2.7.4.2. Picking
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Do you use software from another vendor to handle this process? If so, how is the
process carried out?
A:
Q: 14) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse
control unit, etc.)?
A:
Q: 15) How do you determine the location at which an item must be picked?
Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by the
plant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your picking
location?
A:
Q: 16) Do you group together deliveries for which picking is to take place over a certain time
interval?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 17) How do you plan the picking sequence of the individual deliveries?
Explanation: User exit for delivery sorting within a wave pick User exit for delivery sorting
within a wave pick
A:
Q: 18) Which documents are used for picking and what information do they contain
(planned time, transport equipment to be used, etc.)?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 4) Do you need to be able to pack certain articles in certain packaging materials only?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in other
units?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you require detailed information on the type and number of the packing materials
to be used for picking? If so, which algorithms do you use to determine this information?
Explanation: Can the rough workload estimate be used, in order to create the relevant
information?
A:
Q: 7) Do you want to pack items of a delivery in such a way that you know which and how
many articles are in each shipping material (for example, wire basket or roll container)?
Explanation: Control whether integrated packaging can be used in the area of delivery
processing.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you require packing documents (packing list) and what information do these
contain?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,
several packages into one container?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Do you need to check the maximum capacity limit of packing materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transaction
on the packing station for the R/3 System?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 14) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what information
do they contain?
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
A:
A:
3. Production
3.1. Discrete Production
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you require tools based on individual lots and orders for processing your
production plans?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Which criteria do you want to be taken into account during conversion (for example,
MRP controller, release date, material, sales order)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you require different order types in order to, for example, control the automatic
selection of routings in various ways, predefine costing data in various ways or specify
strategies for batch determination?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) To determine the production dates and capacity requirements of the operations within
an order, you must schedule the order. Which types of scheduling do you want to use?
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do you require material availability check during order creation? Should this check be
carried out for individual or for all components of an order?
A:
Q: 7) Do you have operations that are processed externally, that is to say not carried out in
your own company but given to a vendor who does the work in his own workshops (e.g. with
subcontracting processes or capacity bottlenecks)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 8) Do you require collective orders in order to carry out functions simultaneously for a set
of orders (for example, release, schedule, quantity chage, backflush, calculations)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Do you ever need to split an existing production order on which work has already
started into two separate production orders?
A:
Q: 11) Do you want to integrate documents from the Document Management System
(DMS) into the production order?
A:
Q: 12) Do you want to use simulation orders, for example, to see what effect changes to
original data (sales order, master data) have on a production order?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) It is possible to trigger certain functions automatically after the order release (for
example, creation of transport requirements, creation of inspection lots, printout of orders,
creation of serial numbers). Do you want to make use of this?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you print production documents (e.g. operation control ticket, job ticket, pull list,
confirmation slip, time ticket)?
A:
A:
3.1.2. Material Staging
3.1.2.1. Processing the Pull List
Questions:
Q: 1) Are your production storage locations separate from the central warehouses?
A:
A:
A:
A:
3.1.2.2. Picking
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you use picking lists with which you can determine and execute all withdrawals still
to be executed for a production order?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) In the case of stock transfers, do you wish the material to be immediately available at
the receiving plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to transport goods receipts to more than one physical storage facility?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you wish to issue stock material for production/process orders from just one or
from several storage locations?
A:
Q: 2) Will the material provision occur from warehouse management (control cycle
records)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?
A:
Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
A:
3.1.3.2. Capacity Dispatching and Leveling
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
3.1.4. Production Order Execution
3.1.4.1. Goods Issue Processing for Production Orders
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Do you want to enter the withdrawal of material components for your order manually
or post it automatically on the order confirmation (backflush)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Can planned goods issue quantities differ from the actual quantities? What then
happens with the material reservation?
A:
Q: 4) Are there any components in your company that require batch handling? Is batch
determination used?
A:
Q: 5) Which mechanism is used to activate a goods issue (for example, a pull list)?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Do you process backorders (orders which can't be shipped when they're requested)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) There are various ways of entering backflushes in an order. Which do you want to
use?
A:
Q: 2) Which data must be confirmed (quantities, dates, personnel data, scrap, etc)?
A:
A:
Q: 4) Should goods issue be posted automatically to the storage location while backflushing
an operation?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What requirements do you have with regard to the quantity of goods received?
A:
Q: 2) Do you tolerate variances vis à vis the planned quantity of a goods receipt?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to initially post inward movements into the warehouse/stores to "stock in
quality inspection"?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they in
unrestricted-use stock?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage
(putaway).
A:
Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?
Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer order
form, sticker, etc.)?
A:
Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in the
goods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post to
stock - move to inspection area?
Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or
remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area
- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is
created?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.
A:
Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to place
the materials? Is this done manually?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins) for your stock materials?
A:
Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?
A:
Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shipping
point, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?
A:
Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to use mass processing to execute certain production order functions?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Q: 1) Do you require period and quantity-based tools for processing your production plans?
A:
Q: 2) Do you produce the same product or a similar product over a longer period?
A:
Q: 3) Do your products always flow through the machines and work centers in the same
sequence?
A:
Q: 4) Do you use Repetitive Manufacturing as a make-to-stock tool, that is, with no direct
reference to the sales order?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
3.2.1. Processing of Master Production Schedule
3.2.1.1. Production Planning in the Planning Table
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) How will you assign the production version to the production line?
A:
Q: 5) Are your products produced on several production lines? In the planning table, will
you want to monitor the capacity load over several production lines?
A:
3.2.1.2. Sequencing
Questions:
A:
3.2.2. Material Staging
3.2.2.1. Processing the Pull List
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Are your production storage locations separate from the central warehouses?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?
A:
Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
A:
Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Do you want to separate the backflush process, that is, split the backflush into
performance critical and performance uncritical processes (separated backflush)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How will you handle the reprocessing of backflushed items (negative stocks or
reprocessing records)?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
A:
Q: 2) Do you have products that must meet high quality requirements and comply with legal
requirements (FDA, GMP) (Regulated Production)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you require production campaigns in order to carry out more efficient setup and
clean-out processes and to settle fixed costs to the orders more precisely?
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Which criteria do you want to be taken into account during conversion (for example,
MRP controller, release date, material, sales order)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How many process orders will you have per period (day, week, month)?
A:
Q: 2) How long will be the typical lead times for process orders?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) Which criteria will be taken into account during the selection of master data
(production version)?
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you have multiple outputs during one manufacturing process ? Are the materials
that are produced in addition (co-products or by-products) cost-relevant?
A:
Explanation: Different order types are required to, for example: - Control the automatic
selection of the master recipe in different ways - Preassign data for costing in different ways -
Specify different strategies for batch determination - Make sure that only approved recipes
are used in production - Control the process data documentation
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 11) Will the batch number for the material to be produced be assigned during order
creation (automatically or manually)? Do you want the batch to be classified during automatic
assignment?
A:
Q: 12) Will you require a manually triggered batch determination for the components?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Do you want the creation and release of the order to take place in one step?
A:
A:
Q: 15) Is it necessary to change approved recipes during order processing? Describe the
approval procedure.
A:
Q: 16) Will you need special user statuses dependent on the order type?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 19) Do you want the release of an order to only be possible after successful resource
selection?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 5) Do you want the batch number to be assigned for the material to be produced during
order release (automatically)? Do you want the batch to be classified during automatic
assignment?
A:
A:
Q: 7) Which functions should be automatically triggered after order release (e.g. creation of
transport requirements, creation of inspection lots, printout of orders)?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
3.3.2. Capacity Requirements Planning
3.3.2.1. Capacity Evaluation
Questions:
A:
3.3.2.2. Capacity Dispatching and Leveling
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
3.3.2.3. Process Flow Scheduler (PFS) - Capacity Planning and
Optimization
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) In the case of stock transfers, do you wish the material to be immediately available at
the receiving plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to transport goods receipts to more than one physical storage facility?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you wish to issue stock material for production/process orders from just one or
from several storage locations?
A:
Q: 2) Will the material provision occur from warehouse management (control cycle
records)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?
A:
Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
A:
Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want the goods issue to be processed using the PI sheet or with the goods
issue transaction?
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 4) Can the planned goods issue quantities be different from the actual quantities? What
will then happen to the material reservation?
A:
Q: 5) Will you use components that are batch managed? Will batch determination be used?
A:
Q: 6) Are there any components for which batch determination can take place
automatically?
A:
Q: 7) Are there any components for which batch determination must be carried out
manually?
A:
Q: 8) Which mechanism will be used to trigger a goods issue (for example, pull list)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Which process will be used to determine the current consumption dates?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you process backorders (orders which can't be shipped when they're requested)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want the confirmation to be carried out using the PI sheet or the backflush
transaction?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What requirements do you have with regard to the quantity of goods received?
A:
Q: 2) Do you tolerate variances vis à vis the planned quantity of a goods receipt?
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to initially post inward movements into the warehouse/stores to "stock in
quality inspection"?
A:
A:
A:
A:
3.3.5. Process Management
3.3.5.1. Control Recipe Creation
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
3.3.5.2. Control Recipe Transfer
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
3.3.5.3. PI Sheet Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) Which data do you want to display in the PI sheet (for example, control information,
notes with additional information, references to documents, component information)?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) How shall deviations from the planned values be treated (tolerances, follow-on
actions, etc.)?
A:
A:
Questions:
Explanation: You can use cockpits to make available information and function calls that you
need over and over again at a central position.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you have a certified interface between the distributed control system and the SAP
System?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Which data will be transferred between the SAP System and distributed control
system?
A:
Q: 4) Which information will the process control system collect and perhaps filter?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will process messages ever have to be created manually (for example, during
malfunctions, etc.)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How do you want deviations or unplanned events to be reported? Where shall this
information be sent (for example, message to mail user)?
A:
A:
A:
3.3.6. Process Data Documentation / Process Order Completion
3.3.6.1. Material Reconciliation
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to analyze and verify the quantity of ingredients used at the end of the
production process by comparing the material quantity that really entered the production
process with the planned material quantity?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
3.3.7.2. Evaluations: Logistics Information System
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
A:
Q: 2) Do you have fixed control cycles, in which both the number of containers as well as
the container quantity are set and one procurement element is created for each emptied
container (classic KANBAN)?
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to use KANBAN integrated with material requirements planning? Are the
materials to be planned in the planning run and corresponding procurement proposals
created, which provide a preview for the next consumption? Replenishment is, however,
Explanation: Do you want to use KANBAN integrated with material requirements planning?
Are the materials to be planned in the planning run and corresponding procurement
Requirement Gathering Questions
proposals created, which provide a preview for the next consumption? Replenishment is,
however, only triggered by the kanban signal. (Classic KANBAN with MRP)
A:
Q: 4) Do you want the quantities withdrawn to be entered directly into the system (manually
or plant data collection) and do you want the system to automatically set the kanban to
EMPTY when the kanban quantity is reached (KANBAN with quantity signal)?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Would you like to use KANBAN cross-plant (possible for the replenishment strategy
stock transfer with stock transfer reservation and in-house production with production
orders)?
A:
Q: 8) Do you want to use the automatic kanban calculation to ensure optimal settings,
regular checks and adjustments to the control variables (number of kanbans and material
quantity per kanban)?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, IN
PROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) It is possible to trigger certain functions automatically after the order release (for
example, creation of transport requirements, creation of inspection lots, printout of orders,
creation of serial numbers). Do you want to make use of this?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you print production documents (e.g. operation control ticket, job ticket, pull list,
confirmation slip, time ticket)?
A:
A:
3.4.2.3. Production Order Execution
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) There are various ways of entering backflushes in an order. Which do you want to
use?
A:
Q: 2) Which data must be confirmed (quantities, dates, personnel data, scrap, etc)?
A:
A:
Q: 4) Should goods issue be posted automatically to the storage location while backflushing
an operation?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What requirements do you have with regard to the quantity of goods received?
A:
Q: 2) Do you tolerate variances vis à vis the planned quantity of a goods receipt?
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to initially post inward movements into the warehouse/stores to "stock in
quality inspection"?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) There are various ways of entering backflushes in an order. Which do you want to
use?
A:
Q: 2) Which data must be confirmed (quantities, dates, personnel data, scrap, etc)?
A:
A:
Q: 4) Should goods issue be posted automatically to the storage location while backflushing
an operation?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 4) How will you assign the production version to the production line?
A:
Q: 5) Are your products produced on several production lines? In the planning table, will
you want to monitor the capacity load over several production lines?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, IN
PROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
3.4.4. Replenishment In-House Production with Manual KANBAN
3.4.4.1. Status Change Kanban to FULL (Automatic GR and GI)
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, IN
PROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?
A:
A:
3.4.4.2. Backflush Kanban (Automatic GR and GI, Status Change
Kanban)
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What requirements do you have with regard to the quantity of goods received?
A:
Q: 2) Do you tolerate variances vis à vis the planned quantity of a goods receipt?
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to initially post inward movements into the warehouse/stores to "stock in
quality inspection"?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?
A:
Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notification
have been received?
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.
A:
Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)
on your order form?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 8) Are purchase orders automatically created from GRs be transmitted to the vendor?
Explanation: In the standard system no message records are generated for purchase orders
that are generated automatically from a goods receipt! However, this may be desired,
especially for returns.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
3.4.5.2. Goods Receipt Processing (Central Delivery)
Questions:
Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.
A:
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which goods receipt inspections (which may be triggered by the system) and which
inspection results (e.g. expiration date) are entered in the system?
A:
A:
Q: 7) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?
A:
Q: 8) Which information do you use as a basis for planning your goods receipts (volume,
weight, expected time requirements, etc.)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 9) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order
considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?
A:
Q: 10) For which material types do you wish to record data at the time of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 11) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"
at a different location than those posted to normal stock?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!
A:
Q: 13) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you
order in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.
A:
Q: 14) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be
used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?
A:
Q: 15) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping
instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 18) If you use Warehouse Management, describe the stock put-away process (how the
goods are placed into storage).
A:
Q: 19) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person who
enters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?
A:
Q: 20) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enter
the goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the
inspection has been carried out?
Explanation: QM module
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 21) How is the recipient to be notified of a goods receipt for material intended for direct
consumption/usage?
A:
Q: 22) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time
of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 23) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.
A:
A:
Q: 25) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?
Which information should be included in the printout?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, IN
PROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?
A:
A:
3.4.6. Replenishment External Procurement with Stock Transfer
Orders (Plnt to Plnt
3.4.6.1. Goods Issue Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?
A:
Q: 2) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work
order?
A:
A:
Q: 4) How will the consumption of these parts be entered and who will post the return in the
system?
A:
Q: 5) How do you record which materials were received specifically for a work order?
A:
A:
Q: 7) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what
information do they contain?
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?
A:
Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order
considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?
A:
Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"
at a different location than those posted to normal stock?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you order
in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.
A:
Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be
used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?
A:
Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping
instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person who
enters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?
A:
Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enter
the goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the
inspection has been carried out?
Explanation: QM module
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time
of goods receipt?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.
A:
A:
Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?
Which information should be included in the printout?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, IN
PROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?
A:
A:
3.4.7. Replenishment External Procurement with Scheduling
Agreement
3.4.7.1. Transmit Scheduling Agreement Schedule Lines
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?
A:
Q: 4) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order
considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?
A:
Q: 5) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"
at a different location than those posted to normal stock?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!
A:
Q: 7) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you order
in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.
A:
Q: 8) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be
used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?
A:
Q: 9) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping
instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 12) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person who
enters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?
A:
Q: 13) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enter
the goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the
inspection has been carried out?
Explanation: QM module
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time
of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 15) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.
A:
A:
Q: 17) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?
Which information should be included in the printout?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, IN
PROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, IN
PROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?
A:
A:
3.4.9. Replenishment Stock Transfer with Reservation
3.4.9.1. Transfer Posting w. Reference to Reservation (Aut. Status
Change Kanban)
Questions:
Q: 1) In the case of stock transfers, do you wish the material to be immediately available at
the receiving plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Will you carry out transfer postings without deliveries between sites in which postings
are immediately made to stock at the receiving site?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, IN
PROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?
A:
A:
3.4.10. Replenisment Stock Transfer with Direct Transfer Posting
3.4.10.1. Status Change Kanban to FULL
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) As well as EMPTY and FULL, do you need further statuses such as WAIT, IN
PROCESS, IN TRANSIT and IN USE?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you use address lists for direct mailing? According to which criteria the address list
should be reworked (for example, sales volume, equipment number, credit limi t)?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are alternative items required for inquiry processing and how do you handle them?
A:
Q: 3) Do you allow inquiries for products still under development (text item)?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract?
If so, then for what reasons?
A:
Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, delivery
times, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
Q: 5) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?
A:
Q: 6) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the same
contract?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you offer special prices or discounts for contracts (price agreements or contract
prices)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) What are the requirements for completing a contract (for example, full value, quantity
contracts)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 14) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? If
so, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?
A:
Q: 15) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do you
use this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),
service management)?
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract?
If so, then for what reasons?
A:
Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, delivery
times, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
Q: 5) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?
A:
Q: 6) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the same
contract?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you offer special prices or discounts for contracts (price agreements or contract
prices)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) What are the requirements for completing a contract (for example, full value, quantity
contracts)?
A:
Q: 14) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? If
so, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?
A:
Q: 15) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do you
use this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),
service management)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you determine which materials are permitted for value contracts (standard
material, product hierarchy, assortment)?
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Describe which time components you use, and what these depend on.
Examples: loading time, packing time, transit time, transit lead time Time components can
depend on the material, shipping point, and route.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Possible partners in the standard R/3 system include the sold-to party,
goods recipient, payer, billed-to party, freight forwarders, and external service providers.
Decide which partners you want to use.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, delivery
time, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been used
already?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 18) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planning
materials?
A:
Q: 19) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase these
materials, or only for certain orders?
A:
Q: 20) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?
A:
Q: 21) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 24) Do you offer a set of products (Sales BOM)? Please describe the pricing and
availability processing in detail.
A:
A:
Q: 26) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 27) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 29) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for
the free good item)?
A:
Q: 30) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?
A:
Q: 31) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Q: 32) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
A:
Q: 34) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planning
processes.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure in
detail.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail to
credit representative)?
A:
Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management
(e.g. sales order, delivery)?
A:
Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximum
document value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded
(warning, block, error message)?
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?
A:
Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.
A:
Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,
using batch jobs)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you process backorders (orders which can't be shipped when they're requested)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
4.2.5. Shipping
4.2.5.1. Delivery Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Are there business transactions for which the invoice is only generated when the
customer has confirmed the arrival of the delivery?
A:
Q: 2) Do you often have deliveries for which the delivery quantity varies or is not known
exactly at the time of delivery?
A:
4.2.5.3. Picking
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse control
unit, etc.)?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by the
plant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your picking
location?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in other
units?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,
several packages into one container?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transaction
on the packing station for the R/3 System?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?
Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to be
picked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.
Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Describe the typical layout that you use for quality certificates.
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 4) Do you create user-specific quality certificates (layout)? If yes, are there differences in
the layout and data contents? Give example copies.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?
A:
Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods
receipt?
A:
Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received
(or signature on corrected delivery note)?
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
4.2.7. Shipment
4.2.7.1. Transportation Planning and Processing
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
4.2.8. Billing
4.2.8.1. Processing Billing Documents
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?
A:
Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
4.2.8.2. Pro forma Invoice Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Would your customers require a list of all billing documents that were created for a
specified period (e.g. all documents from 1-15 of the month)?
A:
Q: 2) Are there any special discounts that would be applied to this invoice list?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?
A:
A:
4.2.9. Output
4.2.9.1. Output Transfer
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract?
If so, then for what reasons?
A:
Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, delivery
times, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
Q: 5) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?
A:
Q: 6) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the same
contract?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you offer special prices or discounts for contracts (price agreements or contract
prices)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) What are the requirements for completing a contract (for example, full value, quantity
contracts)?
A:
Q: 14) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? If
so, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?
A:
Q: 15) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do you
use this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),
service management)?
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract?
If so, then for what reasons?
A:
Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, delivery
times, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
Q: 5) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?
A:
Q: 6) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the same
contract?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you offer special prices or discounts for contracts (price agreements or contract
prices)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) What are the requirements for completing a contract (for example, full value, quantity
contracts)?
A:
Q: 14) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? If
so, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?
A:
Q: 15) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do you
use this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),
service management)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you determine which materials are permitted for value contracts (standard
material, product hierarchy, assortment)?
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Describe which time components you use, and what these depend on.
Examples: loading time, packing time, transit time, transit lead time Time components can
depend on the material, shipping point, and route.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Possible partners in the standard R/3 system include the sold-to party,
goods recipient, payer, billed-to party, freight forwarders, and external service providers.
Decide which partners you want to use.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, delivery
time, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been used
already?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planning
materials?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 21) Do you use complex products that are manufactured in a large number of variants
(for example, cars) that should be defined as one variant product (variant configuration)? If
yes, please describe in detail (e.g. classification, pricing).
Explanation: Do you use complex products that are manufactured in a large number of
variants (for example, cars) that should be defined as one variant product (variant
configuration)? If yes, please describe in detail (e.g. classification, pricing, configuration
profile, inventory check of existing configurable material).
A:
A:
Q: 23) Do you check availability for the components of the production orders?
A:
Q: 24) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase these
materials, or only for certain orders?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 25) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?
A:
Q: 26) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 29) Do you offer a set of products (Sales BOM)? Please describe the pricing and
availability processing in detail.
A:
A:
Q: 31) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 32) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
A:
A:
Q: 34) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for
the free good item)?
A:
Q: 35) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 36) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Q: 37) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
A:
Q: 39) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planning
processes.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure in
detail.
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail to
credit representative)?
A:
Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management
(e.g. sales order, delivery)?
A:
Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximum
document value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded
(warning, block, error message)?
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?
A:
Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.
A:
Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,
using batch jobs)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
4.3.4. Costing
4.3.4.1. Costing for Sales Document
Questions:
Q: 1) Are you planning to execute a complex make-to-order production, and do you want to
calculate with the construction?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: If so, you can calculate parts of the production structure using the order BOM
cost estimate with the design, without having to know the entire production structure.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you process backorders (orders which can't be shipped when they're requested)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
4.3.6. Shipping
4.3.6.1. Delivery Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Are there business transactions for which the invoice is only generated when the
customer has confirmed the arrival of the delivery?
A:
Q: 2) Do you often have deliveries for which the delivery quantity varies or is not known
exactly at the time of delivery?
A:
4.3.6.3. Picking
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse control
unit, etc.)?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by the
plant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your picking
location?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in other
units?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,
several packages into one container?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transaction
on the packing station for the R/3 System?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?
Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to be
picked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.
Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Describe the typical layout that you use for quality certificates.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Do you create user-specific quality certificates (layout)? If yes, are there differences in
the layout and data contents? Give example copies.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?
A:
Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
A:
Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods
receipt?
A:
Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received
(or signature on corrected delivery note)?
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
4.3.7.3. Confirmation
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
4.3.8. Transport
4.3.8.1. Transportation Planning and Processing
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
4.3.9. Billing
4.3.9.1. Processing Billing Documents
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?
A:
Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
4.3.9.2. Pro forma invoice processing
Questions:
Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Would your customers require a list of all billing documents that were created for a
specified period (e.g. all documents from 1-15 of the month)?
A:
Q: 2) Are there any special discounts that would be applied to this invoice list?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?
A:
A:
4.3.10. Output
4.3.10.1. Output Transfer
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been used
already?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 18) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planning
materials?
A:
Q: 19) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase these
materials, or only for certain orders?
A:
Q: 20) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?
A:
Q: 21) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 25) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 26) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
A:
A:
Q: 28) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for
the free good item)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 29) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?
A:
Q: 30) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Q: 31) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
A:
Q: 33) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planning
processes.
A:
Q: 34) Are there occasions when the delivery should be created at the same time as the
order (rush orders)?
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 9) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.
A:
Q: 10) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
Requirement Gathering Questions
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 13) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 14) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Q: 16) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase these
materials, or only for certain orders?
A:
Q: 17) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 21) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 22) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 24) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for
the free good item)?
A:
Q: 25) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?
A:
Q: 26) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Q: 27) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
A:
Q: 29) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planning
processes.
A:
Q: 30) Do customers, who order and pick up goods immediately, require a printed invoice
straight away (cash order)?
A:
A:
Q: 32) How do you handle exception processing for cash sales (for example, if required
quantity is not found in warehouse)?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure in
detail.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail to
credit representative)?
A:
Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management
(e.g. sales order, delivery)?
A:
Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximum
document value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded
(warning, block, error message)?
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?
A:
Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,
using batch jobs)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
4.4.3. Shipping
4.4.3.1. Delivery Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
4.4.3.2. Picking
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse control
unit, etc.)?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by the
plant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your picking
location?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in other
units?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,
several packages into one container?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transaction
on the packing station for the R/3 System?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work
order?
A:
A:
Q: 4) How will the consumption of these parts be entered and who will post the return in the
system?
A:
Q: 5) How do you record which materials were received specifically for a work order?
A:
A:
Q: 7) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what
information do they contain?
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 11) Do you want to send the pallet identification information to your customer?
A:
Questions:
A:
4.4.4. Billing
4.4.4.1. Processing Billing Documents
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
4.4.4.2. Pro Forma Invoice Processing
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Would your customers require a list of all billing documents that were created for a
specified period (e.g. all documents from 1-15 of the month)?
A:
Q: 2) Are there any special discounts that would be applied to this invoice list?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?
A:
A:
4.4.5. Output
4.4.5.1. Output Transfer
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, delivery
time, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been used
already?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 13) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 14) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Q: 16) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planning
materials?
A:
Q: 17) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase these
materials, or only for certain orders?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 20) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?
A:
Q: 21) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 24) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 25) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for
the free good item)?
A:
Q: 26) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 27) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Q: 28) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure in
detail.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail to
credit representative)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management
(e.g. sales order, delivery)?
A:
Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximum
document value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded
(warning, block, error message)?
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?
A:
Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.
A:
Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,
using batch jobs)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) What support (e.g. price simulation) does the buyer need in order to assign the
purchase requisition?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 5) Which sources of supply will you use for purchase requisitions? Are these sources of
supply internal and/or external to your company?
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasing
department manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the department
manager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under what
circumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -
for external services
A:
Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?
A:
Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?
A:
4.5.3.3. Release Purchase Requisition
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasing
department manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the department
manager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under what
circumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -
for external services
A:
Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?
A:
Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?
A:
4.5.3.4. Release Purchase Requisition
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Example: all requisitions for over $1000 must be approved by the purchasing
department manager, all requisitions for over $10000 must be approved by the department
manager and the chief financial officer. If yes, describe the approval process, and under what
circumstances the approval process applies - for stock material - for consumable material -
for external services
A:
Q: 2) Are the purchase requisitions subject to a release strategy? If so, which criteria apply?
A:
Q: 3) How is the person responsible for releasing the purchase requisition to be notified?
A:
4.5.4. Purchasing
4.5.4.1. Schedule Line (Schedule Agreement)
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How do you wish to synchronize (monitor) the delivery schedules/SA releases with
respect to the quantities delivered?
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to offer your vendors the option of viewing the scheduling agreement
releases via the Internet?
Explanation: The prerequisites for using Internet release are that the Supplier Workplace is
installed in your system and that the vendors concerned can access it via the Internet. In the
release creation profile you can specify which release type is to be handled as an Internet
release.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will contract release orders be created in R/3 manually, with reference to purchase
requisitions, and/or automatically? (For more details, refer to the Source Administration
Scenario.) - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want the system to check whether the purchase price is within a predefined
tolerance in your system, compared with the material valuation price?
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you order material in a unit of measure that differs from the one used for
stockkeeping purposes?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Do you pay for material in a different unit of measure than the one that is shown in the
PO/and or used for stock putaway?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Do you plan and enter freight costs in the PO? If yes, describe the basis of the costs.
Also indicate if any types of costs can be determined automatically (for example, freight costs
per piece, per unit of weight, as a percentage of the value).
A:
Q: 10) Do you want to prevent users from changing the account assignment of items in
purchasing documents for which they have no authorizations? If so, for which purchasing
documents?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 11) Do you have to declare your ordering activities to the authorities? If so, describe.
A:
Q: 12) Do you allow overdeliveries? If so, specify the percentage variance for the individual
materials/material types.
A:
Q: 13) On the occasion that a vendor sent you less than the quantity ordered, would you
ever want this shortfall to be considered an under delivery, with no further deliveries
expected? Please list the values for each material/material group.
Explanation: In case of exceeding this value, it will be a partial delivery. In case the value
stayed below, it will be an under delivery
A:
Q: 14) Can the materials you purchase be subject to different tax types? (For example,
based upon the material purchased, based upon the plant for which the material is
purchased, etc)? o
A:
Q: 15) Do your POs issued to vendors contain specific transport or packing instructions? Is
vendors' compliance with the transport and packing instructions to be recorded when the
goods are received ?
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Once you have issued a purchasing document to a vendor, do you want to track
"confirmations" your vendor may return to you regarding the order?
Explanation: Examples: 1) Order acknowledgements which confirm the order dates and
quantities. 2) Shipping notifications, informing you that the vendor has shipped the goods
(you can have goods receipts with reference to shipping notifications). 3) Any other - please
describe.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) What do you do if the order acknowledgment contains quantity and/or delivery date
variances vis à vis the purchase order or a previous acknowledgment?
A:
Q: 4) Which type of vendor confirmation do you need and at which time intervals? Which
events should trigger a confirmation?
A:
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Questions:
Explanation: Example: all purchase orders for over $100,000 must be approved by the
purchasing department manager, all purchase orders over $1 million must be approved by
the President. Describe the approval process, and under what circumstances the approval
process applies. - for stock material - for consumable material - for external services
A:
Q: 2) How is the person responsible for approval to be notified? - Approver checks R/3
regularly, by phone, by e-mail, by workflow, other.
Explanation: Background: Workflow for release procedure Background: Workflow for release
procedure
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 3) How are your RFQs and rejection letters to your vendors to be transmitted?
A:
Q: 4) How long after ordering and before the time of delivery should a shipping notification
have been received?
A:
Explanation: Customizing and master data message determination Customizing and master
data message determination
A:
Explanation: If you are using EDI, note also the EDI process in the reference structure.
A:
Q: 7) Do you wish to adopt vendors' own nomenclature for characteristics (color codes, etc.)
on your order form?
A:
A:
4.5.4.8. Transmission of Shipping Notifications
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How many days after the due delivery date will you send messages to your vendors
urging delivery of the overdue goods?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Should this deadline monitoring vary for different materials or articles? If so, please
explain.
A:
Q: 3) Will you send out reminders regarding outstanding vendor confirmations if the due
date is exceeded? Acknowledgment deadline is exceeded?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: What kinds of purchasing document output (for example printouts, fax
messages, EDI) will you send to your vendors? 1) Complete purchasing document 2) Change
notice (When a purchasing document which has already been outputted and sent to a vendor
is changed, you can only output the changes instead of the entire document) 3) Reminders
(send before the due date) 4) Urging letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) 4) Urging
letters or "expeditors" (send after a due date) If you use order confirmations and/or shipping
notifications: 5) Urging Letter for Outstanding Acknowledgement or Shipping notification
notification If you use scheduling agreements: 6) Rolling Delivery Schedule 7) Urging Letter
Related to Rolling Delivery schedules
A:
Q: 5) Will you send urging messages (expediters) to your vendors in the case of overdue
deliveries. If so, how many days after the due date will you do this?
A:
Q: 6) How are reminders and urging letters (expediters) to be sent to your vendors?
A:
4.5.5. Goods Receipt
4.5.5.1. Goods Receipt Processing with Reference
Questions:
Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
Q: 4) Which goods receipt inspections (which may be triggered by the system) and which
inspection results (e.g. expiration date) are entered in the system?
A:
A:
Q: 6) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?
A:
Q: 7) Which information do you use as a basis for planning your goods receipts (volume,
weight, expected time requirements, etc.)?
A:
Q: 8) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order
considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?
A:
Q: 9) For which material types do you wish to record data at the time of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 10) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"
at a different location than those posted to normal stock?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!
A:
Q: 12) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you
order in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.
A:
Q: 13) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be
used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?
A:
Q: 14) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping
instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 17) If you use Warehouse Management, describe the stock put-away process (how the
goods are placed into storage).
A:
Q: 18) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person who
enters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?
A:
Q: 19) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enter
the goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the
inspection has been carried out?
Explanation: QM module
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 20) How is the recipient to be notified of a goods receipt for material intended for direct
consumption/usage?
A:
Q: 21) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time
of goods receipt?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 22) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.
A:
A:
Q: 24) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?
Which information should be included in the printout?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you reduce the amount of your vendors' invoices automatically in the event of
variances?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you have vendors who create one invoice for a delivery period?
A:
Q: 5) Do you receive mixed invoices (credit and debit items in the same document)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 7) List the types of tax that are generally applicable and should therefore be
automatically suggested in the standard system when an invoice is entered.
A:
Q: 8) If there are different types of tax, can groups of these tax types occur together under
certain circumstances?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 9) If you are implementing QM, do you always require that goods receipts have passed
QM inspection before being paid ?
A:
Explanation: Notes: Delivery costs are additional costs such as for express delivery.
A:
Q: 11) Do you sometimes have to change the account assignment for a certain purchase
order at the time of invoice verification?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Which other messages do you want to send to your vendors or to people within your
organization with respect to the invoice receipt?
A:
Q: 14) Is a goods receipt always necessary for invoice verification purposes? If so, do you
allow reversal of the goods issue after the invoice has been posted? has been entered?
A:
A:
Q: 16) Do you wish to notify Purchasing if the invoice price varies from the purchase order
price?
A:
Q: 17) Specific to Brazil: Describe the Nota Fiscal process including special situations such
as future delivery, importation, returnable transport packing, and freight.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 18) Do you use tax jurisdiction codes? Specify the codes used.
A:
Q: 19) Do you receive invoices with a large volume of data for which no checking is
necessary?
A:
Q: 20) Do you receive invoices relating to transactions that are not administered in the
system?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Create a list of which R/3 messages are sent to which business partners, which IDoc
type is used, and which EDI standards the messages are to be converted into.
A:
Q: 2) From how many different business partners will you receive EDI messages?
A:
Q: 3) Describe the changes you want to make to the standard EDI messages.
Explanation: If your customer or vendor uses message fields differently from the way you
use them, you need to make assignment changes. In some cases, you may need to add
more fields. Remember to distinguish between adjustments re mapping and adjustments re
function modules in R/3.
A:
Q: 4) Under which operating system do you want your EDI subsystem to run?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 5) Which interface technique do you want to use for exchanging messages between R/3
and your subsystem?
A:
Explanation: For information on which EDI subsystems have been certified by SAP, look
under http://www.sap.com/products/compsoft/certify/solution.htm#cross_apps or in SAPNet -
R/3 Frontend (formerly OSS) under note number 0114714
A:
Q: 7) Make a list showing the number of all outgoing messages (customer-specific) and the
desired send time.
A:
Q: 8) Create a list showing the number of all incoming EDI messages (customer-specific)
and the desired processing time
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) According to which rules do you effect automatic settlement with regard to goods
receipts?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Describe the information flow between Purchasing, Logistics and Invoice Verification
in the case of errors.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to block invoices for late delivery of goods? If so, block the invoice when
the number of days late times the value of the late items is greater than X. Specify a value for
X.
A:
Q: 3) Invoices can be entered in the system but may be automatically blocked due to
variances. Specify the maximum quantity and price variances that are allowed.
Explanation: When using purchase order price unit of measure, how big is the quantity
difference between GR quantity and IV quantity (in purchase order price unit of measue) you
tolerate without warning or error messages?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to block invoice items whose value exceeds a certain amount? What is
the threshold value for invoice items 1) with reference to a purchase order 2) without
reference to a purchase order?
A:
Q: 5) Who is to be notified in the event of variances between the purchase order price and
the invoice price? How is this person to be notified?
A:
A:
Q: 7) Who checks and processes invoices that have been blocked for payment?
le manager)
A:
4.5.7. Billing
4.5.7.1. Processing Billing Documents
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?
A:
Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
4.5.7.2. Pro Forma Invoice Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Would your customers require a list of all billing documents that were created for a
specified period (e.g. all documents from 1-15 of the month)?
A:
Q: 2) Are there any special discounts that would be applied to this invoice list?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?
A:
A:
4.5.8. Output
4.5.8.1. Output Transfer
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been used
already?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planning
materials?
A:
Q: 19) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase these
materials, or only for certain orders?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 22) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 23) Do you allow customers to keep your material in stock while you retain ownership?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 24) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 28) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 29) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
A:
A:
Q: 31) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for
the free good item)?
A:
Q: 32) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?
A:
Q: 33) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 34) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
A:
Q: 36) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planning
processes.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What method will be used to determine when to bill the customer for consumed
material?
A:
Q: 2) How are you be notified when your customer has sold the product?
A:
4.6.1.3. Consignment Pickup
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Do you let customers place material back into consignment stock after it has been
issued? (Consignment Return Delivery Processing)
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure in
detail.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail to
credit representative)?
A:
Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management
(e.g. sales order, delivery)?
A:
Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximum
document value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded
(warning, block, error message)?
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?
A:
Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,
using batch jobs)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you process backorders (orders which can't be shipped when they're requested)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
4.6.4. Shipping
4.6.4.1. Delivery for Consignment Fill-up
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse control
unit, etc.)?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by the
plant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your picking
location?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in other
units?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,
several packages into one container?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transaction
on the packing station for the R/3 System?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?
Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to be
picked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.
Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to be
picked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.
Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Describe the typical layout that you use for quality certificates.
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you create user-specific quality certificates (layout)? If yes, are there differences in
the layout and data contents? Give example copies.
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they in
unrestricted-use stock?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage
(putaway).
A:
Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?
Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer order
form, sticker, etc.)?
A:
Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in the
goods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post to
stock - move to inspection area?
Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or
remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area
- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is
created?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.
A:
Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to place
the materials? Is this done manually?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins) for your stock materials?
A:
Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shipping
point, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?
A:
Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?
A:
Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
A:
Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?
A:
A:
A:
4.6.5.3. Confirmation
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods
receipt?
A:
Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received
(or signature on corrected delivery note)?
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
4.6.6. Transport
4.6.6.1. Transportation Planning and Processing
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
4.6.7. Billing
4.6.7.1. Processing Billing Documents
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?
A:
Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
4.6.7.2. Pro Forma Invoice Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?
A:
A:
4.6.8. Output
4.6.8.1. Output Transfer
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Are there internal costs charged between subsidiaries and how are they billed?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been used
already?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planning
materials?
A:
Q: 19) Do you sell goods that you purchase from a vendor? Do you always purchase these
materials, or only for certain orders?
A:
Q: 20) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?
A:
Q: 21) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 24) Do you offer a set of products (Sales BOM)? Please describe the pricing and
availability processing in detail.
A:
A:
Q: 26) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 27) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
A:
A:
Q: 29) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for
the free good item)?
A:
Q: 30) How do you handle issuing of assets, waste, raw material, analysis?
A:
Q: 31) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Q: 32) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
A:
Q: 34) How do you follow up on your customer requirements? See also production planning
processes.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
4.7.2. Shipping
4.7.2.1. Delivery Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Are there business transactions for which the invoice is only generated when the
customer has confirmed the arrival of the delivery?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Do you often have deliveries for which the delivery quantity varies or is not known
exactly at the time of delivery?
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse control
unit, etc.)?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by the
plant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your picking
location?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in other
units?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,
several packages into one container?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transaction
on the packing station for the R/3 System?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?
Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to be
picked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.
Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?
A:
Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods
receipt?
A:
Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received
(or signature on corrected delivery note)?
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
4.7.4. Transport
4.7.4.1. Transportation Planning and Processing
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
4.7.5. Billing
4.7.5.1. Processing Billing Documents
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?
A:
Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
4.7.5.2. Pro Forma Invoice Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?
A:
A:
4.7.6. Output
4.7.6.1. Output Transfer
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been used
already?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 21) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 22) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 24) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Q: 25) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
A:
4.8.2. Shipping
4.8.2.1. Delivery Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 7) Do you group deliveries together to expedite the picking process (picking wave)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Are you supported by a sub-system when picking (e.g. radio, PDC, warehouse control
unit, etc.)?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, the picking/storage location is determined in the delivery by the
plant, shipping point, and storage condition. What other criteria determine your picking
location?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to use multi-level packing? That is, do you combine materials in other
units?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 5) Do you combine packed materials into other units (shipping units), for example,
several packages into one container?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you need direct verification for information on the physical packaging transaction
on the packing station for the R/3 System?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?
Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to be
picked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.
Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).
A:
Questions:
A:
4.8.3. Transport
4.8.3.1. Transportation Planning and Processing
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
4.8.4. Billing
4.8.4.1. Billing Document for Free-of Charge Delivery
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?
A:
Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
4.8.4.2. Pro Forma Invoice Processing
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?
A:
A:
4.8.5. Output
4.8.5.1. Output Transfer
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 9) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like to
appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 10) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Q: 12) Do you take your materials in your customers stock into account when planning
materials?
A:
Q: 13) Do you let customers place material back into consignment stock after it has been
issued? (Consignment Return Delivery Processing)
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
Q: 14) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
Q: 15) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 16) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Q: 19) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 9) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 10) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 11) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
Q: 14) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 15) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
A:
Q: 16) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Q: 17) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
A:
4.9.2. Shipping
4.9.2.1. Delivery for Returnable Packaging Issue
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
Requirement Gathering Questions
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) When do you process goods issue and how (delivery time, transportation time)?
Explanation: Note: An SD order creates a delivery immediately, which does not need to be
picked. You only need to post the goods issue to build up the customer consignment stock.
Decide when and where the goods issue is to be posted (for example, manually or in batch).
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
4.9.3. Transport
4.9.3.1. Transportation Planning and Processing
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
4.9.4. Billing
4.9.4.1. Billing Returnable Packaging
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?
A:
Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
4.9.4.2. Billing Document Cancellation
Questions:
Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?
A:
A:
4.9.5. Output
4.9.5.1. Output Transfer
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you accept returns on all materials? If not, which materials can not be returned
and why?
A:
Q: 6) To which type of stock will the product be placed on return (for example: inspection,
unrestricted, quality, blocked)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do your debit and credit notes (memos) need to go through an approval process? If
so, describe it.
A:
Q: 2) Are credit/debit notes linked to previous documents (for example, orders, invoices)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
4.10.1.3. Invoice Correction Request
Questions:
Q: 1) Do your debit and credit notes (memos) need to go through an approval process? If
so, describe it.
A:
Q: 2) Are credit/debit notes linked to previous documents (for example, orders, invoices)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
4.10.2. Shipping
4.10.2.1. Delivery for Returns
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they in
unrestricted-use stock?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage
(putaway).
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?
Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer order
form, sticker, etc.)?
A:
Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in the
goods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post to
stock - move to inspection area?
Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or
remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area
- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is
created?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to place
the materials? Is this done manually?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins) for your stock materials?
A:
Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?
A:
Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 23) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shipping
point, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?
A:
Q: 24) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
4.10.3.2. Confirmation
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods
receipt?
A:
Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received
(or signature on corrected delivery note)?
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
4.10.4. Shipment
4.10.4.1. Transportation Planning and Processing
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
4.10.5. Billing
4.10.5.1. Credit Memo from Customer Complaint / Returns
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) Do you wait to bill the customer until receipt of delivery has been confirmed?
A:
Q: 16) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 17) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 18) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 20) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 21) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
4.10.5.2. Billing Document Cancellation
Questions:
Q: 1) Under which circumstances and why would you cancel a billing document?
A:
A:
4.10.6. Output
4.10.6.1. Output Transfer
Questions:
A:
Explanation: Note: Collect sample printouts for billing documents, credit memos and debit
memos, and decide which information (data fields) these documents should contain.
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 11) Would you not like to post a material account to the vendor as an offsetting account?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which general methods of price determination do you use (e.g. list price with
discounts, surcharges)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Which price types do you use, what are your criteria, and how do you compute them?
A:
Q: 3) Do you work with surcharges? If so, which types of surcharge and criteria do you use
and how is the calculation carried out?
A:
Q: 4) Do work with discounts? If so, what kind of discounts and criteria do you use and how
is the calculation carried out?
A:
Q: 5) Which prices, surcharges, discounts, and freight costs apply to the whole document
and which apply to the item level only?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 7) Do work with freight costs? If so, what kinds of freight costs and criteria do you use
and how is the calculation carried out?
A:
Q: 8) Do you work with taxes? If so, which types of tax and criteria do you use and how is
the calculation carried out?
A:
Q: 9) R/3 customer hierarchies define complex buying structures within a single enterprise
and allow different pricing for each hierarchy. Are there also hierarchical buying structures
within your customers' enterprises?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 11) Must the R/3 System access information stored in another system (external or
internal) in order to calculate a price?
A:
Q: 12) Does the same pricing structure apply to all order types?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you work with commissions (e.g. for sales personnel, carriers/forwarders)?
A:
Q: 15) Which pricing information do you record for statistical purposes (without changing
the price)? For example, material costs, profit margins, or sub-totals printed on invoices.
A:
A:
Q: 17) If you process orders using EDI, do you accept the expected order price per item or
the expected order value?
A:
Q: 18) If you process cross-company orders, do you calculate these based on a specified
amount or on a percentage of the price per piece?
A:
A:
Q: 20) Is the system to cumulate the amounts for certain conditions (e.g.discounts) and de-
activate the discount once a specified maximum value has been reached (tracking cumulative
values)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 21) Do you have multiple prices and discounts for a customer and require the system to
search the combination of all eligible prices and discounts and give the customer the "best" or
"lowest" price?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 23) Do you need to determine prices based on the variant configuration results? For
example, when selling an automobile, options for number of doors, color, engine size, and
music system help determine the price to be charged.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 25) Do you carry out a price determination process for projects with make-to-order
production?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 28) How are the pricing conditions specified (e.g. quantity, percentage, scales, fixed
values)?
A:
Q: 29) Which reports and analyses do you need for price determination purposes?
A:
Q: 30) Do you base the price of an item on the production cost or the cost of purchase of
the material?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 31) Do all the variants of a generic article have different sales prices?
A:
Q: 32) If so, do the sales prices of the generic article variants differ in only a few cases?
A:
Q: 33) Does the sales price of a structured article (set, prepack, display) result from adding
together the individual sales prices and including a markup, or is the sales price determined
using a different calculation rule?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 35) Ares sales conditions to be adopted from other systems or other R/3 systems (such
as the end consumer prices suggested by the manufacturer)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 36) If you work in the wholesale area: Do you wish to overwrite conditions determined in
sales or store orders stemming from master records with e.g. end consumer prices and use
them for subesequent documents?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 37) Do work with discounts in kind? If so, what kinds of discount in kind do you use?
A:
Q: 38) Do all the variants of a generic article have the same purchase prices (or can they
have different purchase prices)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do your debit and credit notes (memos) need to go through an approval process? If
so, describe it.
A:
Q: 2) Are credit/debit notes linked to previous documents (for example, orders, invoices)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) How often do you reimburse the customer for their rebates - weekly, monthly,
quarterly or yearly?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you allow partial settlements for rebates? How do you handle them?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
4.12. Foreign Trade Processing
4.12.1. Legal Control
4.12.1.1. Monitoring of Legal Control Regulations
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you wish to check for the export license at delivery time, or when you create the
sales order and the delivery?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) Which license types (for example, individual export licenses) do you need in the legal
controls that apply to you (for example, foreign trade law)?
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
4.12.3. Communication/Print
4.12.3.1. Output Transmission for Foreign Trade Documents
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 1) Who owns the inventory? To whom are the costs of managing the inventory
allocated?
A:
Q: 2) At which level do you valuate material (for example, company level, plant level)?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 6) Do you use picking and packaging functions with scanners (radio frequency)?
A:
Q: 7) Do you prepare raw materials for a production order on a scale and do you have to
ensure that exactly this material combination is used in the order?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you maintain specific material reservations (for sales, for production) for your
stock materials?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) How long after the reservation date are open reservations canceled?
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point in
time (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?
A:
Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?
A:
Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?
A:
Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?
A:
Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?
A:
Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of your
external carrier?
A:
Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.
A:
Q: 23) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? If
so, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point in
time (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?
A:
Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?
A:
Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?
A:
Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?
A:
Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?
A:
Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?
A:
Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of your
external carrier?
A:
Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 23) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? If
so, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they in
unrestricted-use stock?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage
(putaway).
A:
Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?
Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer order
form, sticker, etc.)?
A:
Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in the
goods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post to
stock - move to inspection area?
Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or
remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area
- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is
created?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.
A:
Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to place
the materials? Is this done manually?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins) for your stock materials?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?
A:
Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shipping
point, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?
A:
Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stock
purge?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) on
the defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?
A:
Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined that
they are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) The material stock balances shown in your legacy system are to be transferred to the
R/3 System. Will the stocks be valuated at the prices specified in the R/3 e total value of the
former system be taken over?
A:
Q: 2) If you do not use the R/3 Purchasing functionality, describe the process of receiving
goods from a vendor.
A:
Q: 3) If you do not use production orders of the R/3 System, describe the process of
receiving goods from production.
A:
Q: 4) Should the person who posts a goods receipt be able to use a different account
assignment than the one specified via the automatic account determination process?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to transport goods receipts to more than one physical storage facility?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) In the case of stock transfers, do you wish the material to be immediately available at
the receiving plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
5.1.5.3. Confirmation
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods
receipt?
A:
Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received
(or signature on corrected delivery note)?
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?
A:
Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
A:
Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what information
do they contain?
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?
A:
Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
A:
Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Describe the cycle counting intervals. Specify plant, material, and interval.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you block the relevant stock during the physical inventory count?
Explanation: Setting of flag when creating physical inventory Setting of flag when creating
physical inventory
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 3) Which types of physical inventory do you wish to use to count the materials in your
warehouses/stores?
Explanation: Linkage via ALE may be necessary Linkage via ALE may be necessary
A:
5.2.1.3. Determination of Scope for Periodic and Continuous Inventory
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you block the relevant stock during the physical inventory count?
Explanation: Setting of flag when creating physical inventory Setting of flag when creating
physical inventory
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) Which types of physical inventory do you wish to use to count the materials in your
warehouses/stores?
Explanation: Linkage via ALE may be necessary Linkage via ALE may be necessary
A:
5.2.1.4. Definition of Scope of Periodic Inventory
Questions:
Q: 1) Which types of physical inventory do you wish to use to count the materials in your
warehouses/stores?
Explanation: Linkage via ALE may be necessary Linkage via ALE may be necessary
A:
5.2.1.5. Sample Processing
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) At what level do you analyze the results of inventory sampling (merchandise category,
layout, etc.)
A:
Q: 3) Will you use random sample profiles when carrying out physical inventories of
materials?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) How do you carry out the physical inventory count (e.g. manually, using bar code
scanners)?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Who is responsible for posting physical inventory differences? Specify the persons
responsible and the maximum differences allowed.
A:
5.2.2. WM Inventory
5.2.2.1. Storage Type Block
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you block any storage types for the purposes of physical inventory? Name the
storage types that are to be blocked.
A:
A:
5.2.2.2. Continuous Inventory WM
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you carry out a continuous inventory in your warehouses/stores via zero stock
check?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Under what conditions are inventory entry and the stock placement process linked in
your warehouses/warehouse areas?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Describe the cycle counting intervals. Specify plant, material, and interval.
A:
A:
5.2.2.5. Print Inventory List
Questions:
Q: 1) Which count procedure do you use for your branches to ensure that inventory data is
recorded in full?
A:
Q: 2) How do you carry out your physical inventory count? (e.g. manually, using bar code
scanners
A:
Q: 3) How many document items (each quant and storage bin counts as one item) do you
have in your physical inventory document?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you record the results of the physical inventory manually or electronically (e.g.
barcode scanner, radio-supported)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Are recounts executed? If yes, which deviation tolerances have you set?
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point in
time (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?
A:
Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?
A:
Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?
A:
Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?
A:
Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?
A:
Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of your
external carrier?
A:
Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.
A:
Q: 23) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? If
so, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point in
time (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?
A:
Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?
A:
Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?
A:
Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?
A:
Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?
A:
Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?
A:
Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of your
external carrier?
A:
Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.
A:
Q: 23) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? If
so, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Is freight charged to the customer or does the company absorb the cost?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you verify invoices for your forwarding agents? If so, which rules do you use?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?
A:
Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
A:
Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
5.3.4. WM Inventory
5.3.4.1. Storage Type Block
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you block any storage types for the purposes of physical inventory? Name the
storage types that are to be blocked.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
5.3.4.2. Continuous Inventory WM
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you carry out a continuous inventory in your warehouses/stores via zero stock
check?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Under what conditions are inventory entry and the stock placement process linked in
your warehouses/warehouse areas?
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) Describe the cycle counting intervals. Specify plant, material, and interval.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
5.3.4.5. Print Inventory List
Questions:
Q: 1) Which count procedure do you use for your branches to ensure that inventory data is
recorded in full?
A:
Q: 2) How do you carry out your physical inventory count? (e.g. manually, using bar code
scanners
A:
Q: 3) How many document items (each quant and storage bin counts as one item) do you
have in your physical inventory document?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you record the results of the physical inventory manually or electronically (e.g.
barcode scanner, radio-supported)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Are recounts executed? If yes, which deviation tolerances have you set?
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A:
5.3.5.2. Confirmation
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods
receipt?
A:
Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received
(or signature on corrected delivery note)?
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) Are materials posted to quality inspection after goods receipt, or are they in
unrestricted-use stock?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Describe the individual steps from external goods receipt to final placement in storage
(putaway).
A:
Q: 7) Do you have capacity limits for your storage bins, for example, weight, volume...?
Explanation: Index for storage bin structure Index for storage bin structure
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 10) What kind of form (printout) do you need for stock putaways (GR slip, transfer order
form, sticker, etc.)?
A:
Q: 11) Is procured material pending inspection posted to stock or does it remain in the
goods receipt storage area? What happens with the samples: - Keep in GR area - post to
stock - move to inspection area?
Explanation: Will procured material pending inspection be placed into permanent storage or
remain in the goods receipt storage area? What happens with the sample: - Keep in GR area
- place into warehouse - move to inspection area?
A:
A:
Q: 13) Do you print the stock placement (putaway) document when the transfer order is
created?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 15) Please list the storage types that will have placement confirmation.
A:
Q: 16) Does your legacy system automatically determine the storage bin in which to place
the materials? Is this done manually?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Will you maintain placement strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins) for your stock materials?
A:
Q: 19) How many storage bins do you have per storage type?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 20) How many stock putaways (items) do you have per day?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 22) Do you receive articles that have batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 24) Do you group together your pick list for multiple processing for a particular shipping
point, route, pick date, stock placement, stock removal?
A:
Q: 25) Do you receive materials with batch or serial numbers from vendors?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Will you be required to retain costs for material that is inspected as a result of a stock
purge?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you enter data (for example, defects, characteristic results, specific findings) on
the defective material found in the stockroom or on the shop floor?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which documentation should accompany the goods that are returned to the vendor?
A:
Q: 6) Describe the handling of inspection lots where the usage decision has determined that
they are to be rejected and returned to the vendor.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you maintain removal strategies (for example, storage types, storage sections,
storage bins)?
A:
Q: 2) Will you carry out multiple removals of stock from storage at one time?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Which of these stock removal strategies are used for internal procurement?
A:
Q: 4) Do you currently create deliveries for internal procurement of materials from plant to
plant?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 6) Upon what does the your choice of strategy depend (only in the case of several
different strategies)?
A:
Q: 7) On which parameters does the storage bin search process depend when items are
removed from storage (e.g. article, type of movement, etc.)?
A:
Q: 8) Do you carry out complete pallet removals and subsequent return transfers? If so, to
which location is the merchandise returned?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 9) Which documents are generated, at which times, and with which information, when
stock is taken out of storage?
A:
A:
A:
6. Customer Service
Questions:
Q: 1) For which types of products do you provide your services (products for private or
professional use)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to transfer the service history from your current system to SAP R/3?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Which enterprise units are responsible for providing and executing services for a
specific piece of customer equipment?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 9) Do you want to set up a workflow for the processing of notifications and/or orders?
A:
Q: 10) Is any part of your service organization outsourced (or will it be in the future)?
A:
Q: 11) Are certain services activities always performed by external contractors? If yes,
describe these types of services.
A:
Q: 12) Do you want to check the credit limit of your service customers during service
processing?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you use address lists for direct mailing? According to which criteria the address list
should be reworked (for example, sales volume, equipment number, credit limi t)?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are alternative items required for inquiry processing and how do you handle them?
A:
Q: 3) Do you allow inquiries for products still under development (text item)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Do you use a reduced customer master record when you enter a new customer?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you want to combine inquiry processing with customer master data entry?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 9) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the RFQ?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 10) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the RFQ?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, delivery
time, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) Do your customers require time and material quotations? (If yes, consider using
resource-related quotations.)
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) Do you want to combine quotation processing with customer master data entry?
A:
Q: 11) Do you use a reduced customer master record when you enter a new customer?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the quotation?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 15) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter a quotation?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Do you use a certain order type to indicate that the sales order references a contract?
If so, then for what reasons?
A:
Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to contracts (for example, delivery
times, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
Q: 5) Are your contracts valid for a set time period or do you offer renewals?
A:
Q: 6) Do you allow different customers to make release orders (call-offs) from the same
contract?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 10) Do these contracts contain dates and quantities to which the customer must adhere?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
Q: 12) When a contract is created, should the follow-up activity be automatically created? If
so, which type of activity (telephone call, letter, and so on)? Sales Letter)?
A:
Q: 13) Do you utilize resource-related billing for contracts? Describe in which cases do you
use this functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting),
service management)?
A:
Q: 14) Do you have long-term service agreements with your customers (for example to
perform preventive maintenance on your customer equipment periodically)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 15) If so, please describe the different types of service contracts that you offer to your
customer (for example differentiation by validity period or type of service).
A:
Q: 16) Can your customer choose between different contract options (for example, 24h
versus 12h response times)? List all options available for the different contract types.
A:
Q: 17) Will the contract options selected by the customer influence the pricing of the service
contract? If so, please describe the criteria influencing the price.
A:
Q: 18) Do you have contract-specific price agreements with your customers, and if so, what
do they look like (for example, the service contract with the customer covers all the spare
parts that are used during a service under the contract)?
A:
Q: 19) What technical objects are covered by the service contract item. Do you use one
service contract per piece of equipment, or does one service contract includes all the
customer's equipment?
A:
Q: 20) Do you want to assign maintenance plans to your customer maintenance contracts?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 21) Do you use resource-related billing for contracts? Describe when you would use this
functionality (for example, make-to-order production, specific services (consulting), service
management).
A:
Q: 22) Do you offer master contracts to which other contracts are linked?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you perform follow-up activities when the service contract with the customer
expires?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) From the list, select the follow-up activities that you perform. If you select 'Other',
explain further.
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which department is responsible for billing the customer (for example, service
department, accounting department)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you already carry out resource-related billing? Do you use transaction VA90 in the
process?
Explanation: We recommend you create the billing request in resource-related billing using
transaction DP90 (in CS) or DP91 (in SD). Recommended procedure in the switch from VA90
to DP90/DP91: (1) Bill old orders to completion (2) Bill new orders with DP90/DP91 In certain
circumstandes, periodically billed orders require the use of a conversion program (for more
details, see the documentation or release notes for 4.5 and 4.6). release notes for 4.5 and
4.6).
A:
Q: 3) Do you bill your services at different percentage rates (for example, service hours at
100%, material at 50%)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 4) Do you invoice the customer periodically for the service contract, and if so, how long
is the period?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) If you only invoice the customer once, what other criteria do you use to decide when
an invoice is sent to the customer (for example, operating time of equipment)?
A:
Q: 6) When do you create the invoices for the customer (for example, at the end of each
period, or on specific dates defined by the customer)?
A:
Q: 7) Does the customer receive one invoice per service contract, or is there one invoice for
several contracts?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Do you need the detailed information from the CO line items or is it enough to bill
summarized CO totals records?)
Explanation: System performance is better when summarized CO totals records are billed.
A:
Explanation: Dynamic Item Processor (DIP): If you are generating a debit memo request
only, positive and negative expenditures are cleared against each other. If a debit and credit
memo requests are being generated, positive and negative expenditures can be displayed
separately. displayed separately.
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: For example, determine materials using the cost center or a cost element/cost
center/activity type combination.
A:
Explanation: For example: actual costs, statistical key figures, or cash payments. You can
combine the sources. There is a customer exit you can use to define your own sources.
define your own sources.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want to define a particular default rate (in %) for particular sources of
expense requiring billing? If yes, define the sources and the relevant percentages.
A:
Q: 15) Do you use specific accounting indicators when confirming expenses (examples:
guarantees or grace periods)? If yes, which?
A:
A:
6.1.2.4. Billing Processing for Service Contract
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
6.1.2.5. Service Contract Cancellation
Questions:
Q: 1) Do the service agreements with your customers include specific cancellation rules that
must be adhered to?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you operate a "Telephony" call center or only a "Walk in" call center?
Explanation: "Walk in" Call Center: Your customer comes to you in person. "Telephony" Call
Center: Your customer can process their request with you over the telephone.
A:
Q: 2) Do you operate one or more call centers? How many queues are necessary?
A:
Explanation: Branch and CTI must be reconciled with one another. Each CTI requires a
particular telephony server as an interface between CTI and SAPphone.
A:
Q: 4) Do you already have a telephony server? If not, who creates or provides the
telephony server?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: The telephony server forms the necessary interface between your telephone
infrastructure and the SAP applications. It is delivered by some CTI manufacturers. (General
structure: PBX <-> CTI <-> Telephony server (interface) <-> SAPphone <-> CIC <-> R/3)
A:
Q: 5) Which CIC components are required to set up the CIC framework and in what order?
A:
A:
Q: 7) Is the set-up of a particular framework sufficient for all center employees (agents), or
should several frameworks be configured for particular agent groups?
Explanation: Several agents can use the same framework for the same or similar areas of
activity.
A:
Q: 8) Which business processes should your call center agents perform individually in your
company?
Explanation: Definition of all the transactions, which should be available, and their
arrangement on the screen (tabstrips).
A:
Q: 9) Which default information should be available in the individual entry fields for the
transactions?
A:
Q: 10) Which information should be copied from the business data display or set after the
business processes have been executed?
A:
Q: 11) Do you want to integrate access to HTML pages in your Front Office?
A:
Q: 12) Do you also want to be able to call up your customer contact activities from other
components or HTML pages (and not just using the Action Box pushbuttons)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: A new approach was implemented for Release 4.6 which divides the Action Box
into a visible and an invisible part. The decoupled Action Box functionality enables you to
execute Action Box transactions without the visible Action Box tabstrip components. Action
Box transactions can also be called up from other visible components developed by the user
or from HTML pages (Internet, Intranet or customer-defined HTML pages) which are started
by transactions in the Action Box. Moreover, you can now also define a transaction in the
Action Box as a HTML session.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which types of evaluations do you want from your Call Center? Describe.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you use address lists for direct mailing? According to which criteria the address list
should be reworked (for example, sales volume, equipment number, credit limi t)?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are alternative items required for inquiry processing and how do you handle them?
A:
Q: 3) Do you allow inquiries for products still under development (text item)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Do you use a reduced customer master record when you enter a new customer?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you want to combine inquiry processing with customer master data entry?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the RFQ?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 10) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the RFQ?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How is a customer call processed in your company? Please describe in detail the
different process steps.
Explanation: For example, the service request is first created in the system by the hotline,
which enters a description of the problem and then forwards the service request to to a
specialist in that area.
A:
Q: 3) What information do you require to process the call further (for example, service
contract number, service history of equipment)?
A:
Q: 4) Do you have customers located outside the time zone of your service center?
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in a
single form?
A:
Q: 6) Do you want information about the reference object displayed automatically when a
notification is created? If yes, what information?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) How do you identify the technical objects, for which the customer requires the service
(for example, serial number, address)?
A:
A:
Q: 9) Select the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information you
will require to create the notification. Add other business partners to the list, if necessary.
A:
Q: 10) How do you describe a customer problem? Do you enter a verbal problem
description or do you use standardized codes, for example, to determine the damage, cause
of damage, or object parts?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) Do you allow your customers to enter their service requests directly in your system
using the Internet?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How do you want to configure the interface for your notification with regard to control
data, breakdown data, activity data, and task data?
A:
Q: 14) Do you have standard tasks that you always perform for different types of customer
calls? If yes, describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 15) Are you restricted to a certain period of time, in which these tasks should be
executed?
A:
Q: 16) Do the service contracts that you have with your customers include agreements on
specific tasks with defined response time that you have to adhere to? If yes, describe them.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 18) Should the person responsible for a task be informed automatically by the system?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 19) Do you want to set up an escalation workflow for notifications and tasks?
A:
Q: 20) Do you record the performed activities that solved the customer problem in a
standardized way (that is, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possible solutions
for a problem?
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to archive notifications? If so, provide a copy of your document archiving
policy. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements.
A:
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, delivery
time, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Do your customers require time and material quotations? (If yes, consider using
resource-related quotations.)
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) Do you want to combine quotation processing with customer master data entry?
A:
Q: 11) Do you use a reduced customer master record when you enter a new customer?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
Q: 14) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the quotation?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 15) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter a quotation?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been used
already?
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?
A:
Q: 19) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 22) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 23) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
A:
A:
Q: 25) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for
the free good item)?
A:
Q: 26) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 27) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
Q: 28) Are sales orders created with reference to a preceding document (inquiry,
quotation)?
A:
A:
Q: 30) If the sales orders are entered by the stores, how are these transmitted to the central
retailing system?
A:
Q: 31) Where and how is subsequent processing initiated for a sales order?
A:
Q: 32) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the sales order?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 33) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the sales order?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 37) Which scenarios do you use for sales order processing with regard to procurement
and shipping?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 39) Do you carry out any special checks on sales orders for export?
A:
Q: 40) Do you process or evaluate sales orders in accordance with specific criteria?
A:
Q: 41) Can you also save incomplete sales orders? Under which conditions are these
processed further?
A:
Q: 42) Are there occasions when the delivery should be created at the same time as the
order (rush orders)?
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 48) Do customers, who order and pick up goods immediately, require a printed invoice
straight away (cash order)?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 50) How do you handle exception processing for cash sales (for example, if required
quantity is not found in warehouse)?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure in
detail.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail to
credit representative)?
A:
Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management
(e.g. sales order, delivery)?
A:
Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximum
document value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded
(warning, block, error message)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?
A:
Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.
A:
Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,
using batch jobs)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods
receipt?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received
(or signature on corrected delivery note)?
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you wish to check for the export license at delivery time, or when you create the
sales order and the delivery?
A:
Q: 2) Which license types (for example, individual export licenses) do you need in the legal
controls that apply to you (for example, foreign trade law)?
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Who approves the goods issue? (You could use workflow to handle this process.)
A:
A:
Q: 4) Does delivery coincide with goods issue? (If so, consider the implications for the
process of delivery from projects.)
Explanation: It is possible to generate a delivery note without effecting the goods receipt. It is
also possible to combine these functions.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Do service technicians have their own local stock (e.g. in their car) from which they
can take spare parts required for servicing?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post their
withdrawal in the system?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 9) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?
A:
Q: 10) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work
order?
A:
Q: 11) Do service engineers have their own local stock (for example, in their car) from
which they take spare parts required for servicing?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?
A:
A:
Q: 14) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?
A:
Q: 15) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,
available stock, etc.)?
A:
Q: 16) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what
information do they contain?
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 8) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 10) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 12) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 13) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 14) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 15) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 16) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 18) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 19) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 20) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point in
time (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?
A:
Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?
A:
Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?
A:
Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?
A:
Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?
A:
Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of your
external carrier?
A:
Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.
A:
A:
6.3.7. Billing
6.3.7.1. Declarations to Authorities
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
Q: 23) Describe the different types of periodic billing that you use.
A:
Q: 24) Describe the billing process for these types of bills. Are they reviewed or approved
by project managers prior to being issued?
A:
Q: 25) Do you bill customers based on a schedule such as monthly, quarterly or some other
specified timing? (If yes, consider running the billing due list for projects according to this
schedule.)
A:
Q: 26) Is your billing based on milestones? (If yes, consider PS-milestone functions.)
A:
Q: 27) Milestone billing allows you to control a bill release on the project side. Who is
responsible for approving the draft invoice?
A:
Q: 28) Is your billing related to a specific delivery? (If yes, consider using a milestone to
control the release of invoices as deliveries are confirmed. Also consider structuring the
invoice so that it relates to the delivery schedule.)
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 29) Is your billing based on fixed amounts or a percentage of order? (If yes, consider this
when structuring the billing plan in your project.)
A:
Q: 30) Is your billing based on the percentage of completion? (If yes, consider using
milestones to calculate the POC and to control billing).
A:
Q: 31) Is your billing based on percentage of completion? (If yes, consider using earned
value analysis milestone technique to calculate the percentage of completion and control the
billing.)
A:
Q: 32) Do you post actual revenues, discounts, or allowances to your project? (If yes,
consider the accounts and the implications for value categories in project reporting.)
A:
Q: 33) It is important to consider which items appear in a billing document and the
accounting treatment for them. Describe the accounting processes used for time and
material-related billing in your projects.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Note: For information about the maintenance plan, see documentation on master
data.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you schedule your maintenance plans manually, or should the system perform the
scheduling automatically?
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) How is a customer call processed in your company? Please describe in detail the
different process steps.
Explanation: For example, the service request is first created in the system by the hotline,
which enters a description of the problem and then forwards the service request to to a
specialist in that area.
A:
Q: 3) What information do you require to process the call further (for example, service
contract number, service history of equipment)?
A:
Q: 4) Do you have customers located outside the time zone of your service center?
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in a
single form?
A:
Q: 6) Do you want information about the reference object displayed automatically when a
notification is created? If yes, what information?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 7) How do you identify the technical objects, for which the customer requires the service
(for example, serial number, address)?
A:
A:
Q: 9) Select the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information you
will require to create the notification. Add other business partners to the list, if necessary.
A:
Q: 10) How do you describe a customer problem? Do you enter a verbal problem
description or do you use standardized codes, for example, to determine the damage, cause
of damage, or object parts?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) Do you allow your customers to enter their service requests directly in your system
using the Internet?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How do you want to configure the interface for your notification with regard to control
data, breakdown data, activity data, and task data?
A:
Q: 14) Do you have standard tasks that you always perform for different types of customer
calls? If yes, describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 15) Are you restricted to a certain period of time, in which these tasks should be
executed?
A:
Q: 16) Do the service contracts that you have with your customers include agreements on
specific tasks with defined response time that you have to adhere to? If yes, describe them.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 18) Should the person responsible for a task be informed automatically by the system?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 19) Do you want to set up an escalation workflow for notifications and tasks?
A:
Q: 20) Do you record the performed activities that solved the customer problem in a
standardized way (that is, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possible solutions
for a problem?
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment was
broken, damage, cause of damage) about a customer problem in order to create a service
history or to enable further evaluations?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technically
completed?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technical
information? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want to
have codes.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do your debit and credit notes (memos) need to go through an approval process? If
so, describe it.
A:
Q: 2) Are credit/debit notes linked to previous documents (for example, orders, invoices)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
6.4.2.5. Notification Archiving
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to archive notifications? If so, provide a copy of your document archiving
policy. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What different types of service do you provide (for example, preventive maintenance,
repair, installation)? List the service types and outline the differences in planning and
execution.
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in a
single form?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) Mark in the following list whether services are performed by internal service
technicians and/or sub-contractors.
A:
Q: 4) When do you plan your service order; what information do you require from the
system with regard to labor resources (for example, availability of service technician, number
of people, duration of work)?
A:
Q: 5) How do you proceed with an external assignment with the sub-contractor? Choose
one or more of the following options.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 7) Do you ever have more than one service technician working on the same service?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 9) Do you want to configure a special search help for partners in your order?
Explanation: For example, a search help for particular people (with particular qualifications),
which are assigned to a particular work center. For the partner function of type "Person", it is
possible to set an indicator for a special search help for partners.
A:
Q: 10) For which operation types do you want to represent the operation description using
service specifications?
A:
Q: 11) Do you provide the service technicians who perform a service with a list of individual
activities (task list)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) If yes, which of the following types of task lists do you require?
A:
Q: 14) How do you manage the spare parts required for the service? For example, who
plans the required parts, how will the spare parts arrive at the customer?. Describe the
process in detail.
A:
Q: 15) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, daily
requirements, individual requirements)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planning
phase?
A:
Q: 17) Do you want to generate purchase requisitions and reservations when the order is
created?
Explanation: You can configure whether reservations and purchase requisitions are
generated when the order is created or only when the order is released.
A:
Q: 18) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance order
during the planning phase?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 20) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard to
working conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.
A:
A:
Q: 22) At which level do you schedule work (for example, for a shift, crew, skill, qualification,
or an individual person and so on)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 23) How exact is your scheduling (for example, usage backlog, capacity evaluation,
capacity scheduling)?
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 26) Do you want to use the service order as the basis for creating quotations for your
customers?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you assign materials (spare parts) to work orders during the planning phase?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 3) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, daily
requirements, individual requirements)?
A:
Q: 4) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planning
phase?
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance order
during the planning phase?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard to
working conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Identify the internal papers that you require for the different people and order types
involved (for example, job ticket for employee, picking list).
A:
A:
Q: 4) Do you send certain external documents to the customer (for example, an order
confirmation)?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Note: This process is only for service activities performed manually on technical
systems by the technician.
A:
Explanation: Rough decription of process flow, the way in which the employee executing the
task obtains the necessary materials.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to change capacity/work centers for periods with overload? (If yes,
consider changing the work center/assignment/activity dates manually from the evaluation
reports.)
A:
Q: 3) Do you do short term capacity planning? (If yes, ensure the time horizon for the
capacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period. If no, ensure the time horizon for the
capacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period.)
A:
A:
Q: 5) Are resources to be shared across departments (for example plant maintenance and
projects)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: If yes, consider how you want to define the priorities between the departments
and make sure that you can use different order types at the work center.
A:
A:
6.4.4.2. Capacity Dispatching and Leveling
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you process the overload on capacities/wk centers? (If yes, you could use the
capacity leveling functions- dispatching and deallocating).
A:
Q: 2) Do you prefer to use a graphical planning tool for capacity leveling? (If yes, use the
graphical capacity planning tool If no, consider using the tabular capacity planning tool.)
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 4) When you split order operations, do you want the system to create capacity loads
automatically for individual people?
Explanation: See the release note for 4.6C: "Automatic Creation of Employee Requirements
Records (Splits)".
A:
A:
A:
6.4.5. Goods Movements
6.4.5.1. Goods Issue Processing
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Who approves the goods issue? (You could use workflow to handle this process.)
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Does delivery coincide with goods issue? (If so, consider the implications for the
process of delivery from projects.)
Explanation: It is possible to generate a delivery note without effecting the goods receipt. It is
also possible to combine these functions.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Do service technicians have their own local stock (e.g. in their car) from which they
can take spare parts required for servicing?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post their
withdrawal in the system?
A:
Q: 9) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?
A:
Q: 10) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work
order?
A:
Q: 11) Do service engineers have their own local stock (for example, in their car) from
which they take spare parts required for servicing?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?
A:
A:
Q: 14) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?
A:
Q: 15) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,
available stock, etc.)?
A:
Q: 16) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what
information do they contain?
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been used
already?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?
A:
Q: 19) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 22) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 23) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
A:
A:
Q: 25) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for
the free good item)?
A:
Q: 26) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Q: 27) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
Q: 28) Are sales orders created with reference to a preceding document (inquiry,
quotation)?
A:
A:
Q: 30) If the sales orders are entered by the stores, how are these transmitted to the central
retailing system?
A:
Q: 31) Where and how is subsequent processing initiated for a sales order?
A:
Q: 32) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the sales order?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 33) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the sales order?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 37) Which scenarios do you use for sales order processing with regard to procurement
and shipping?
A:
A:
Q: 39) Do you carry out any special checks on sales orders for export?
A:
Q: 40) Do you process or evaluate sales orders in accordance with specific criteria?
A:
Q: 41) Can you also save incomplete sales orders? Under which conditions are these
processed further?
A:
Q: 42) Are there occasions when the delivery should be created at the same time as the
order (rush orders)?
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 48) Do customers, who order and pick up goods immediately, require a printed invoice
straight away (cash order)?
A:
A:
Q: 50) How do you handle exception processing for cash sales (for example, if required
quantity is not found in warehouse)?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure in
detail.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail to
credit representative)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management
(e.g. sales order, delivery)?
A:
Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximum
document value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded
(warning, block, error message)?
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?
A:
Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.
A:
Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,
using batch jobs)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods
receipt?
A:
Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received
(or signature on corrected delivery note)?
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure in
detail.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail to
credit representative)?
A:
Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management
(e.g. sales order, delivery)?
A:
Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximum
document value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded
(warning, block, error message)?
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?
A:
Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.
A:
Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,
using batch jobs)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you wish to check for the export license at delivery time, or when you create the
sales order and the delivery?
A:
Q: 2) Which license types (for example, individual export licenses) do you need in the legal
controls that apply to you (for example, foreign trade law)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Who approves the goods issue? (You could use workflow to handle this process.)
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 4) Does delivery coincide with goods issue? (If so, consider the implications for the
process of delivery from projects.)
Explanation: It is possible to generate a delivery note without effecting the goods receipt. It is
also possible to combine these functions.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Do service technicians have their own local stock (e.g. in their car) from which they
can take spare parts required for servicing?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post their
withdrawal in the system?
A:
Q: 9) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?
A:
Q: 10) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work
order?
A:
Q: 11) Do service engineers have their own local stock (for example, in their car) from
which they take spare parts required for servicing?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?
A:
A:
Q: 14) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?
A:
Q: 15) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,
available stock, etc.)?
A:
Q: 16) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what
information do they contain?
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 8) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 12) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 13) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 14) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
A:
Q: 15) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 16) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 18) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 19) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 20) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point in
time (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?
A:
Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?
A:
Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?
A:
Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?
A:
Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?
A:
Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?
A:
Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of your
external carrier?
A:
Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How does the service technician confirm the activities that are executed at the
customer (for example, a service report on paper, over the Internet and so on)?
A:
Q: 4) At which intervals (e.g., monthly or weekly) and on which level (e.g., one report per
engineer or one report per engineer/customer/equipment) will the service enginee r report
back the activities he has performed?
A:
Q: 5) Are the completion confirmations in your company entered at the level of personnel
number?
Explanation: This function is required for CATS; it can be used with transaction IW41.
A:
Explanation: The permit function for completion confirmations is realized using CATS.
A:
Q: 7) Do you also want to confirm used material at the same time as the time confirmation?
Explanation: This function is limited using CATS, since it involves a jump to the goods issue
transaction in inventory management.
A:
Q: 8) Should the technical completion (for example, for breakdown times, causes of
damage, tasks and so on) be made at the same time as the time confirmation?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 9) Do you also want to enter measurement readings with the completion confirmation?
Explanation: Measurement documents can also be entered at the same time using
transaction IW41.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Do you create completion confirmations centrally, or does each employee enter their
own times themselves?
A:
Explanation: Is required for the entry of a central completion confirmation. Requires print
settings (possibly SAPScript).
A:
Q: 13) How many times per day do your employees enter their working time?
A:
Q: 14) Will you use a Plant Data Collection (PDC) system for your completion
confirmations?
A:
Q: 15) Do you enter the working times of contractors? If yes, how should the external
services be entered?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 16) Do you post trip costs for the service technician to the service order, so that they
show up in the service order cost report and/or can be invoiced to the customer?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you differentiate the times entered according to other activity types (for example,
to distinguish between normal work hours and overtime)?
A:
A:
Q: 4) In what unit and with what accuracy do you want to enter services?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) In which systems do you track employee master data? Are wage rates only
maintained in the R/3 System or in other systems too?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 2) Do you use this data as a basis for indirect activity allocation to cost objects, cost
centers, internal orders and so on?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 3) Explain how such a time sheet is structured today and how it should be structured in
future (what information do you need on the time sheet?).
A:
Q: 4) Does everyone who records working time have a personal number in HR? (If not,
CATS is not supported.)
Explanation: You require at least one HR mini master record before you can use CATS.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: Depending on the person entering the information, different time profiles can be
created. For example, an administrator can enter times for many employees.
A:
A:
Q: 7) Are the labor costs calculated based on actual costs or standard rates?
A:
A:
Q: 9) Please explain the procedure, how employees in your company track and report time
today.
Explanation: For example, how do your developers in Research & Development determine
the time available for their projects: manually on paper, manually in Excel and so on?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Are there special conditions for labor costs when employees work in different
countries or for different profit centers (for example, if an employee from the UK works on a
project in Germany)?
A:
A:
Q: 13) How do your employees enter trip costs? Are the trips linked to the recording of
working time? Describe in detail.
A:
A:
Q: 15) Identify the different categories of activity (activity types) that you use for estimation,
planning and settlement purposes?
A:
Q: 16) What are the various cost collectors, to which employees will charge time (for
example, cost centers, projects, internal orders)?
A:
Q: 17) Do sub-contractors and other third party labor sources have to enter work using
timesheets?
A:
Q: 18) Are these external services settled to a cost center or directly to the project?
A:
A:
Q: 20) How is the cost of overtime calculated? Do you have different types of overtime (for
example, time and a half, double time)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 21) Do you track indirect labor hours, such as vacation, sickness, holiday...? If yes,
define the categories you require and their entry type.
A:
Q: 22) Which financial entries do you currently make for your labor distribution?
A:
Q: 23) How do employees record their working time (time, detail, medium/system)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What is your current timesheet approval strategy for employees and external
services?
A:
Q: 2) Explain the permit procedure for working time or recording of activity allocation for
your employees.
A:
A:
Q: 4) How many employees does the person responsible for approval manage?
Explanation: Consider using the CATS workflow to automate the approval process.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to transfer recorded activity allocations to Controlling using the time
sheet?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) How often does this transfer take place (daily, weekly and so on)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,
employee hours by cost center)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,
employee hours by cost center)?
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you need an evaluation, do see the days on which personnel enter more than a
defined number of hours?
A:
Q: 4) Do you have to see the employee name in the documents for the receiving
component?
A:
Q: 5) Do different roles need to see different timesheet information? (If yes, create report
variants.)
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment was
broken, damage, cause of damage) about a customer problem in order to create a service
history or to enable further evaluations?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technically
completed?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technical
information? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want to
have codes.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you measure and record the current condition of your equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? Describe the different measuring points
and counters that you require for the different pieces of equipment.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 3) How often and according to which rules do you want to settle orders ?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to examine your cost elements for the settlement of orders in greater
detail?
A:
Q: 5) Do you analyze the profitability of single service contracts, including all related service
costs and service revenues?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you intend to have service profitability analysis or profit center analysis within your
company?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Who decides whether the work is fully completed (business completion) and when?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to archive orders? If so, please provide a copy of your document
archiving policy. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements.
A:
Q: 2) How long do you want to retain orders in the system before they are archived?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you create historical orders to track service work, which has already been
completed?
A:
6.4.12. Billing
6.4.12.1. Billing Request Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) Which department is responsible for billing the customer (for example, service
department, accounting department)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you already carry out resource-related billing? Do you use transaction VA90 in the
process?
Explanation: We recommend you create the billing request in resource-related billing using
transaction DP90 (in CS) or DP91 (in SD). Recommended procedure in the switch from VA90
to DP90/DP91: (1) Bill old orders to completion (2) Bill new orders with DP90/DP91 In certain
circumstandes, periodically billed orders require the use of a conversion program (for more
details, see the documentation or release notes for 4.5 and 4.6). release notes for 4.5 and
4.6).
A:
Q: 3) Do you bill your services at different percentage rates (for example, service hours at
100%, material at 50%)?
A:
Q: 4) Do you invoice the customer periodically for the service contract, and if so, how long
is the period?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) If you only invoice the customer once, what other criteria do you use to decide when
an invoice is sent to the customer (for example, operating time of equipment)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 6) When do you create the invoices for the customer (for example, at the end of each
period, or on specific dates defined by the customer)?
A:
Q: 7) Does the customer receive one invoice per service contract, or is there one invoice for
several contracts?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Do you need the detailed information from the CO line items or is it enough to bill
summarized CO totals records?)
Explanation: System performance is better when summarized CO totals records are billed.
A:
Explanation: Dynamic Item Processor (DIP): If you are generating a debit memo request
only, positive and negative expenditures are cleared against each other. If a debit and credit
memo requests are being generated, positive and negative expenditures can be displayed
separately. displayed separately.
A:
A:
Explanation: For example, determine materials using the cost center or a cost element/cost
center/activity type combination.
A:
Explanation: For example: actual costs, statistical key figures, or cash payments. You can
combine the sources. There is a customer exit you can use to define your own sources.
define your own sources.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want to define a particular default rate (in %) for particular sources of
expense requiring billing? If yes, define the sources and the relevant percentages.
A:
Q: 15) Do you use specific accounting indicators when confirming expenses (examples:
guarantees or grace periods)? If yes, which?
A:
A:
6.4.12.2. Resource-Related Billing
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 23) Do you bill customers on a time and material basis? (If yes, consider using resource-
related billing.)
A:
Q: 24) Do you bill internal labor at an hourly, daily rate etc? (If yes, you need to enter the
activity types in Customizing for expense-related billing.)
A:
Q: 25) Describe the different ways that labor and expense are billed for your projects e.g. is
labor billed at fixed billing rates, or as a straight cost plus a markup, or a combination of both,
etc.
A:
Q: 26) Describe your billing process. How often are time and material invoices issued?
A:
Q: 27) It is important to consider which items appear in a billing document and the
accounting treatment for them. Describe the accounting processes used for time and
material-related billing in your projects.
A:
Q: 28) What is the relationship between activities reported against a project and activities
billed to the customer?
Explanation: If there is a difference, consider how the price list is used in SD or how a user
exit determines a price.
A:
Q: 29) If subcontractors are used, are they billed as an expense or as internal labor?
A:
Q: 30) Do you use time and material-related billing? Do you exclude some expenses from
projects from billing?
A:
Q: 31) Are the time and materials cost marked up in price for billing?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 33) If so, describe the way caps are applied e.g. on the total of labor and expense, on
specific expenses etc.
A:
Q: 34) Is there an approval process for these project invoices? (If yes, consider using
workflow and involving the project manager in the process.)
A:
Q: 35) Do you show detailed info in the invoice for time and material-related billing?
Provide us with examples. (If yes, consider using project reports to support the detail
required.)
A:
Q: 36) Do you post actual revenues, discounts, or allowances to your project? (If yes,
consider the accounts and the implications for value categories in project reporting.)
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 23) Describe the different types of periodic billing that you use.
A:
Q: 24) Describe the billing process for these types of bills. Are they reviewed or approved
by project managers prior to being issued?
A:
Q: 25) Do you bill customers based on a schedule such as monthly, quarterly or some other
specified timing? (If yes, consider running the billing due list for projects according to this
schedule.)
A:
Q: 26) Is your billing based on milestones? (If yes, consider PS-milestone functions.)
A:
Q: 27) Milestone billing allows you to control a bill release on the project side. Who is
responsible for approving the draft invoice?
A:
Q: 28) Is your billing related to a specific delivery? (If yes, consider using a milestone to
control the release of invoices as deliveries are confirmed. Also consider structuring the
invoice so that it relates to the delivery schedule.)
A:
Q: 29) Is your billing based on fixed amounts or a percentage of order? (If yes, consider this
when structuring the billing plan in your project.)
A:
Q: 30) Is your billing based on the percentage of completion? (If yes, consider using
milestones to calculate the POC and to control billing).
A:
Q: 31) Is your billing based on percentage of completion? (If yes, consider using earned
value analysis milestone technique to calculate the percentage of completion and control the
billing.)
A:
Q: 32) Do you post actual revenues, discounts, or allowances to your project? (If yes,
consider the accounts and the implications for value categories in project reporting.)
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 33) It is important to consider which items appear in a billing document and the
accounting treatment for them. Describe the accounting processes used for time and
material-related billing in your projects.
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) How is a customer call processed in your company? Please describe in detail the
different process steps.
Explanation: For example, the service request is first created in the system by the hotline,
which enters a description of the problem and then forwards the service request to to a
specialist in that area.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) What information do you require to process the call further (for example, service
contract number, service history of equipment)?
A:
Q: 4) Do you have customers located outside the time zone of your service center?
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in a
single form?
A:
Q: 6) Do you want information about the reference object displayed automatically when a
notification is created? If yes, what information?
A:
Q: 7) How do you identify the technical objects, for which the customer requires the service
(for example, serial number, address)?
A:
A:
Q: 9) Select the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information you
will require to create the notification. Add other business partners to the list, if necessary.
A:
Q: 10) How do you describe a customer problem? Do you enter a verbal problem
description or do you use standardized codes, for example, to determine the damage, cause
of damage, or object parts?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) Do you allow your customers to enter their service requests directly in your system
using the Internet?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 13) How do you want to configure the interface for your notification with regard to control
data, breakdown data, activity data, and task data?
A:
Q: 14) Do you have standard tasks that you always perform for different types of customer
calls? If yes, describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 15) Are you restricted to a certain period of time, in which these tasks should be
executed?
A:
Q: 16) Do the service contracts that you have with your customers include agreements on
specific tasks with defined response time that you have to adhere to? If yes, describe them.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 18) Should the person responsible for a task be informed automatically by the system?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 19) Do you want to set up an escalation workflow for notifications and tasks?
A:
Q: 20) Do you record the performed activities that solved the customer problem in a
standardized way (that is, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possible solutions
for a problem?
A:
A:
Questions:
A: [ ]Yes
Requirement Gathering Questions
[ ]No
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment was
broken, damage, cause of damage) about a customer problem in order to create a service
history or to enable further evaluations?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technically
completed?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technical
information? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want to
have codes.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to archive notifications? If so, provide a copy of your document archiving
policy. If this is not available, please describe specific archiving requirements.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) In your company, who is responsible for the receipt or creation of quality notifications?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 2) In your company, who is responsible for processing the quality notifications that have
been created?
Explanation: Coordination
A:
A:
Q: 4) Which main criteria do you want to use to differentiate notifications? Will you want to
use different notification types?
Explanation: Background: A customer may want to use the same notification types, for
example, customer complaint in different plants or according to different criteria.
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) List the business partners (internal and/or external) whose address information you
require when creating the notification. Add other business partners, if necessary.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 9) How do you describe the problem? Do you use a verbal description or standard
codes?
A:
Q: 10) Do you want to use specific catalogs for each material in notification processing?
A:
Q: 11) Do you want to attach electronic documents (for example, inspection reports) to the
notification?
A:
Explanation: Note: An incorrect assignment is usually the result of a problem with the
documentation.
A:
Q: 13) Do you have ad-hoc tasks that you always carry out for different notification types or
priorities? If so, describe these tasks.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want the person or coordinator responsible for a task to be notified
automatically by the system?
A:
Explanation: Set the "approval required" indicator for the required notification type (IMG
activity: OLQN_CL). An additional notification status "Submit for approval" will be created. be
created.
A:
Q: 16) How do you want to structure the layout of your notification with regard to the
problem description, execution, items, tasks, activities?
A:
Q: 17) Do you want to advise your employees of "related notifications" during notification
processing?
A:
A:
Q: 19) Do you record costs arising from complaints? Describe how you record these.
Explanation: Costs, for example, for wages, material, telephone costs, travel expenses etc.
A:
Q: 20) Do you want to create and activate the QM order, based on the notification? Where
are these costs to be settled?
A:
Explanation: Documents that are usually sent to the nofication addressee (such as
confirmation of receipt, interim notices, 8D reports).
A:
Q: 22) How many notifications do you receive each day or each year?
A:
Q: 23) Do you record the performed activities that solved the customer problem in a
standardized way (for example, using standardized codes) in order to evaluate possible
solutions for a problem?
A:
Q: 24) How is a quality notification processed in your company? Describe the process for
external or internal notifications.
A:
Q: 25) Do you allow your customers to create complaints in your system using the Internet?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 4) Are there any time agreements that are relevant to quotations (for example, delivery
time, commitment dates, validity periods)?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 7) Do your customers require time and material quotations? (If yes, consider using
resource-related quotations.)
A:
A:
A:
Q: 10) Do you want to combine quotation processing with customer master data entry?
A:
Q: 11) Do you use a reduced customer master record when you enter a new customer?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the quotation?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 15) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter a quotation?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) Does your organization have specialists who only process specific types of customer
orders (for example government,international, OEM, reseller) or products (for example,
specific product lines)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you presently separate your standard orders by any variables (for example,
document type, sales organization, sales representative, customer type) for ease of
processing or reporting purposes?
A:
Q: 3) What information do you capture on a sales order? List your current sales order types
(including returns and credit/debit memo requests).
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you convert other sales document types (such as inquiries, quotations) into sales
documents?
A:
Q: 6) When creating an order, do you check to see if the purchase order has been used
already?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 9) What are your rules for checking available stock? Describe them in detail.
A:
Q: 10) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: The consignment stores are usually in the vicinity of the goods recipient.
The customer would like to receive the goods on a just-in-time basis, so lead times are
included in delivery scheduling.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 11) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require on your sales documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information from a sales document do you consider obligatory and would like
to appear on an incompletion log if missing? Do you want it to be possible to save the
document as incomplete if any of this information is missing?
A:
Q: 16) Do you have company-standard codes to track the status of a sales document? If so,
what are they?
A:
A:
Q: 18) Do you receive goods directly from your vendor to fulfill your customer orders?
A:
Q: 19) Does each item have different detailed information? For example, do they have
different ship-to parties?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 22) In certain orders, do you not invoice the customer for the materials?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 23) How do you handle free materials (e.g. samples, donations). Do you use a separate
item or separate order type?
A:
A:
Q: 25) How do you handle free goods in a sales order (with or without a separate item for
the free good item)?
A:
Q: 26) Do you have special requirements (e.g. promotions) for different account postings
(e.g. cost center, profit center)?
A:
Q: 27) When listing sales orders on the screen for further processing, what information do
you need to show?
A:
Q: 28) Are sales orders created with reference to a preceding document (inquiry,
quotation)?
A:
A:
Q: 30) If the sales orders are entered by the stores, how are these transmitted to the central
retailing system?
A:
Q: 31) Where and how is subsequent processing initiated for a sales order?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 32) Do you want to perform a credit limit check when you enter the sales order?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 33) Do you want to perform an availability check when you enter the sales order?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 37) Which scenarios do you use for sales order processing with regard to procurement
and shipping?
A:
A:
Q: 39) Do you carry out any special checks on sales orders for export?
A:
Q: 40) Do you process or evaluate sales orders in accordance with specific criteria?
A:
Q: 41) Can you also save incomplete sales orders? Under which conditions are these
processed further?
A:
Q: 42) Are there occasions when the delivery should be created at the same time as the
order (rush orders)?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 48) Do customers, who order and pick up goods immediately, require a printed invoice
straight away (cash order)?
A:
A:
Q: 50) How do you handle exception processing for cash sales (for example, if required
quantity is not found in warehouse)?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you want to change capacity/work centers for periods with overload? (If yes,
consider changing the work center/assignment/activity dates manually from the evaluation
reports.)
A:
Q: 3) Do you do short term capacity planning? (If yes, ensure the time horizon for the
capacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period. If no, ensure the time horizon for the
capacity evaluation reflects the appropriate time period.)
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 5) Are resources to be shared across departments (for example plant maintenance and
projects)?
Explanation: If yes, consider how you want to define the priorities between the departments
and make sure that you can use different order types at the work center.
A:
A:
6.5.4.2. Capacity Dispatching and Leveling
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you process the overload on capacities/wk centers? (If yes, you could use the
capacity leveling functions- dispatching and deallocating).
A:
Q: 2) Do you prefer to use a graphical planning tool for capacity leveling? (If yes, use the
graphical capacity planning tool If no, consider using the tabular capacity planning tool.)
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 4) When you split order operations, do you want the system to create capacity loads
automatically for individual people?
Explanation: See the release note for 4.6C: "Automatic Creation of Employee Requirements
Records (Splits)".
A:
A:
A:
6.5.5. Goods Movements
6.5.5.1. Goods Receipt Processing for Serviceable Material
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.
A:
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which goods receipt inspections (which may be triggered by the system) and which
inspection results (e.g. expiration date) are entered in the system?
A:
A:
Q: 7) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?
A:
Q: 8) Which information do you use as a basis for planning your goods receipts (volume,
weight, expected time requirements, etc.)?
A:
Q: 9) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order
considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?
A:
Q: 10) For which material types do you wish to record data at the time of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 11) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"
at a different location than those posted to normal stock?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!
A:
Q: 13) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you
order in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.
A:
Q: 14) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be
used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?
A:
Q: 15) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping
instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Q: 18) If you use Warehouse Management, describe the stock put-away process (how the
goods are placed into storage).
A:
Q: 19) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person who
enters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 20) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enter
the goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the
inspection has been carried out?
Explanation: QM module
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 21) How is the recipient to be notified of a goods receipt for material intended for direct
consumption/usage?
A:
Q: 22) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time
of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 23) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.
A:
A:
Q: 25) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?
Which information should be included in the printout?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Who approves the goods issue? (You could use workflow to handle this process.)
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 4) Does delivery coincide with goods issue? (If so, consider the implications for the
process of delivery from projects.)
Explanation: It is possible to generate a delivery note without effecting the goods receipt. It is
also possible to combine these functions.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 7) Do service technicians have their own local stock (e.g. in their car) from which they
can take spare parts required for servicing?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post their
withdrawal in the system?
A:
Q: 9) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?
A:
Q: 10) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work
order?
A:
Q: 11) Do service engineers have their own local stock (for example, in their car) from
which they take spare parts required for servicing?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?
A:
A:
Q: 14) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?
A:
Q: 15) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,
available stock, etc.)?
A:
Q: 16) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what
information do they contain?
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Who approves the goods issue? (You could use workflow to handle this process.)
A:
A:
Q: 4) Does delivery coincide with goods issue? (If so, consider the implications for the
process of delivery from projects.)
Explanation: It is possible to generate a delivery note without effecting the goods receipt. It is
also possible to combine these functions.
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 7) Do service technicians have their own local stock (e.g. in their car) from which they
can take spare parts required for servicing?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) How will the consumption of these parts be recorded and who will post their
withdrawal in the system?
A:
Q: 9) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders?
A:
Q: 10) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work
order?
A:
Q: 11) Do service engineers have their own local stock (for example, in their car) from
which they take spare parts required for servicing?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the
system?
A:
A:
Q: 14) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 15) Is stock posted to the receiving site? If so, which type of stock (stock in transit,
available stock, etc.)?
A:
Q: 16) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what
information do they contain?
Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted
simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Describe the process for receiving goods with reference to a purchase order.
A:
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) Which goods receipt inspections (which may be triggered by the system) and which
inspection results (e.g. expiration date) are entered in the system?
A:
A:
Q: 7) How do you inform the Purchasing Department that goods have been received?
A:
Q: 8) Which information do you use as a basis for planning your goods receipts (volume,
weight, expected time requirements, etc.)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 9) Do you receive quantities less than the ordered quantity? If yes, is the purchase order
considered complete then or do you receive the missing quantities later?
A:
Q: 10) For which material types do you wish to record data at the time of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 11) Do you physically store the goods you have received into "stock in quality inspection"
at a different location than those posted to normal stock?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 12) Do you allow every material to be stored at all storage locations? Please describe!
A:
Q: 13) Do you use a unit of measure for the pricing of the goods other than the unit you
order in? If yes, you can define the variances in customizing.
A:
Q: 14) Do the materials you receive have to be stored for a certain time before they can be
used or do they have an expiration date that you want to keep in the system?
A:
Q: 15) Do you refuse to accept deliveries if the vendor has not complied with the shipping
instructions? (Can be used to evaluate vendors.)
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 18) If you use Warehouse Management, describe the stock put-away process (how the
goods are placed into storage).
A:
Q: 19) If a goods receipt quantity is assigned to a goods issue, do you want the person who
enters the goods receipt to receive a corresponding message?
A:
Q: 20) Will you inspect the material/article at the time of goods receipt? If so, do you enter
the goods receipt and the inspection result or do you only enter the goods receipt after the
inspection has been carried out?
Explanation: QM module
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 21) How is the recipient to be notified of a goods receipt for material intended for direct
consumption/usage?
A:
Q: 22) If you are using batch management, how is the batch number determined at the time
of goods receipt?
A:
Q: 23) Do you classify the batches at the time of goods receipt? Please specify the criteria.
A:
A:
Q: 25) Do you wish to print out the material document as evidence of a goods movement?
Which information should be included in the printout?
A:
Questions:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 1) What different types of service do you provide (for example, preventive maintenance,
repair, installation)? List the service types and outline the differences in planning and
execution.
A:
Q: 2) How often do you visit the customer for the different service types per month/year?
A:
Q: 3) Do you want to be able to process related notification and order data collectively in a
single form?
A:
Q: 4) Mark in the following list whether services are performed by internal service
technicians and/or sub-contractors.
A:
Q: 5) When do you plan your service order; what information do you require from the
system with regard to labor resources (for example, availability of service technician, number
of people, duration of work)?
A:
Q: 6) How do you proceed with an external assignment with the sub-contractor? Choose
one or more of the following options.
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 8) Do you ever have more than one service technician working on the same service?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 10) Do you want to configure a special search help for partners in your order?
Explanation: For example, a search help for particular people (with particular qualifications),
which are assigned to a particular work center. For the partner function of type "Person", it is
possible to set an indicator for a special search help for partners.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 11) For which operation types do you want to represent the operation description using
service specifications?
A:
Q: 12) Do you provide the service technicians who perform a service with a list of individual
activities (task list)?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 14) If yes, which of the following types of task lists do you require?
A:
Q: 15) How do you manage the spare parts required for the service? For example, who
plans the required parts, how will the spare parts arrive at the customer?. Describe the
process in detail.
A:
Q: 16) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, daily
requirements, individual requirements)?
A:
Q: 17) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planning
phase?
A:
Q: 18) Do you want to generate purchase requisitions and reservations when the order is
created?
Explanation: You can configure whether reservations and purchase requisitions are
generated when the order is created or only when the order is released.
A:
Q: 19) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance order
during the planning phase?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 21) How do you plan special tools, documents and so on, which are required to execute
service activities?
A:
Q: 22) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard to
working conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.
A:
A:
Q: 24) At which level do you schedule work (for example, for a shift, crew, skill, qualification,
or an individual person and so on)?
A:
Q: 25) How exact is your scheduling (for example, usage backlog, capacity evaluation,
capacity scheduling)?
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 28) Do you want to use the service order as the basis for creating quotations for your
customers?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you assign materials (spare parts) to work orders during the planning phase?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Which rules do you use to determine material availability (for example, daily
requirements, individual requirements)?
A:
Q: 4) How do you want to plan materials that must be purchased during the planning
phase?
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to create purchase requisitions directly from the maintenance order
during the planning phase?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you consider permits in connection with orders, for example, with regard to
working conditions or safety aspects? If yes, describe your permit procedures.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Identify the internal papers that you require for the different people and order types
involved (for example, job ticket for employee, picking list).
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 4) Do you send certain external documents to the customer (for example, an order
confirmation)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Note: This process is only for service activities performed manually on technical
systems by the technician.
A:
Explanation: Rough decription of process flow, the way in which the employee executing the
task obtains the necessary materials.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) How do you handle risk management in your company? Describe the procedure in
detail.
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) How do you handle the review of blocked sales documents (for example, send mail to
credit representative)?
A:
Q: 9) At which step in the sales process and at what level do you use risk management
(e.g. sales order, delivery)?
A:
Q: 10) Which parameters are considered in the credit check (for example, maximum
document value, time period), and how does the system react if the credit limit is exceeded
(warning, block, error message)?
A:
Q: 11) Do you have a default max. credit limit for new customers?
A:
Q: 12) If you use payment cards, describe the authorization procedure in detail.
A:
Q: 13) Define at which level in your price determination a credit check is carried out.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want the system to carry out credit limit checks automatically (for example,
using batch jobs)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) How much time elapses between delivery of the goods and their inspection, and
between inspection and the arrival of the goods at their final destination? the destination
bin.
A:
A:
A:
Q: 5) Do you want to confirm the quantities involved in when stock is placed into or taken
out of storage manually or automatically?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you inform the vendor of differences in your favor arising at the time of goods
receipt?
A:
Q: 2) Is the vendor supplied with a special document confirming the merchandise received
(or signature on corrected delivery note)?
A:
Q: 3) How do you handle stock differences that are noticed either at the time of transfer
order confirmation or continuous inventory based on bin-to-bin transfer?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Questions:
Q: 1) List all documents required to complete the delivery process (e.g. picking list, packing
list or bill of loading) and what information they contain.
Explanation: Note: For each document, collect sample printouts and decide which
information (data fields) the documents must contain.
A:
Q: 2) If you have multiple plants, how do you determine what plant a product is delivered
from?
A:
Explanation: Note: In R/3, shipping point determination depends on the following objects: -
Plant - Shipping condition (goods recipient) and - Loading group (material master). Decide
which shipping point you want the system to offer as a default, or the alternative shipping
points you would like to overwrite the default with.
A:
Explanation: Note: The route with transit time and transit lead time is used for delivery
scheduling, for example. In the delivery, an alternative route for the sales order or scheduling
agreement can be selected depending on different weight groups.
A:
Q: 5) Do you compute different lead times (for example, picking, packing, loading or
replenishment lead times)? Please describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Describe the lead times you use for delivery scheduling, and the objects
(customer, route, material, shipping conditions) that these lead times depend on.
A:
Q: 6) Do you have a standard lead time in days for the customer#s requested delivery
date?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Explanation: Note: Serial numbers can be assigned at various points such as at the goods
receipt posting (from the production line) or later when the delivery is created.
A:
Q: 9) Do you add additional prices at the delivery time (for example, packing or postage
costs)?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Do you ever group deliveries together for different reason (e.g. freight lists, loading
list, collective picking)?
A:
Explanation: Note: With multilevel packing, you can print out labels for different packaging
levels. Examples of packaging levels are boxes, wire baskets, and pallets. Decide on the
information and format for the labels. Note the special printer requirements.
A:
Q: 13) Do you allow items that weren't in the sales order to be added to a delivery?
A:
Q: 14) What types of text do you require in your delivery documents, and are they required
on output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to delivery note forms for all text types that
you want to print.
A:
Q: 15) What information do you consider necessary for a delivery and would like to appear
on an incompletion log if missing?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 16) Do your customers accept partial deliveries in case of lack of availability and what
are the rules for creating them?
A:
Q: 17) Do you allow sales orders to be combined or split for delivery and what are the
rules?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Explanation: Note: When you check the availability, you should also decide what your ATP
quantity should be. For example, should it only include the physical stock quantity, or should
it also include goods receipts, production orders, and purchase orders?
A:
Q: 19) Do you track Over Delivery or Under Delivery tolerance percentages for your
customers?
A:
Q: 20) What should happen if the delivery quantity differs from the order quantity?
A:
Q: 21) What are the reasons you would ever block a sales document from delivery?
A:
Questions:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 8) Do you use one mode of transport per route or a combination of modes per route, e.g.
road, rail, sea?
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
A:
Q: 14) Do you need to be able to enter your actual transportation data at a later point in
time (for example, time taken, distance travelled)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 15) How do you determine shipment costs (for example, kilometers, volume)?
A:
Q: 16) How do you carry out settlement accounting with the external carrier?
A:
Q: 17) Do you charge stores for the costs of using your own vehicles?
A:
Q: 18) Do you handle several deliveries for different ship-to parties in one single shipment?
A:
Q: 19) According to which criteria do you group deliveries for one shipment?
A:
Q: 20) Do you have your own vehicles or do you use external carriers?
A:
Q: 21) What do you use as a basis for scheduling your vehicles or the vehicles of your
external carrier?
A:
Q: 22) How do you respond to capacity constraints? Describe the contractual conditions.
A:
Q: 23) Do you require shipment documents for physically transporting the merchandise? If
so, what form of document (e.g. paper, EDI)?
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 3) How does the service technician confirm the activities that are executed at the
customer (for example, a service report on paper, over the Internet and so on)?
A:
Q: 4) At which intervals (e.g., monthly or weekly) and on which level (e.g., one report per
engineer or one report per engineer/customer/equipment) will the service enginee r report
back the activities he has performed?
A:
Q: 5) Are the completion confirmations in your company entered at the level of personnel
number?
Explanation: This function is required for CATS; it can be used with transaction IW41.
A:
Explanation: The permit function for completion confirmations is realized using CATS.
A:
Q: 7) Do you also want to confirm used material at the same time as the time confirmation?
Explanation: This function is limited using CATS, since it involves a jump to the goods issue
transaction in inventory management.
A:
Q: 8) Should the technical completion (for example, for breakdown times, causes of
damage, tasks and so on) be made at the same time as the time confirmation?
A:
Q: 9) Do you also want to enter measurement readings with the completion confirmation?
Explanation: Measurement documents can also be entered at the same time using
transaction IW41.
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 11) Do you create completion confirmations centrally, or does each employee enter their
own times themselves?
A:
Explanation: Is required for the entry of a central completion confirmation. Requires print
settings (possibly SAPScript).
A:
Q: 13) How many times per day do your employees enter their working time?
A:
Q: 14) Will you use a Plant Data Collection (PDC) system for your completion
confirmations?
A:
Q: 15) Do you enter the working times of contractors? If yes, how should the external
services be entered?
A:
Q: 16) Do you post trip costs for the service technician to the service order, so that they
show up in the service order cost report and/or can be invoiced to the customer?
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Do you differentiate the times entered according to other activity types (for example,
to distinguish between normal work hours and overtime)?
A:
A:
Q: 4) In what unit and with what accuracy do you want to enter services?
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) In which systems do you track employee master data? Are wage rates only
maintained in the R/3 System or in other systems too?
A:
Q: 2) Do you use this data as a basis for indirect activity allocation to cost objects, cost
centers, internal orders and so on?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 3) Explain how such a time sheet is structured today and how it should be structured in
future (what information do you need on the time sheet?).
A:
Q: 4) Does everyone who records working time have a personal number in HR? (If not,
CATS is not supported.)
Explanation: You require at least one HR mini master record before you can use CATS.
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Explanation: Depending on the person entering the information, different time profiles can be
created. For example, an administrator can enter times for many employees.
A:
A:
Q: 7) Are the labor costs calculated based on actual costs or standard rates?
A:
A:
Q: 9) Please explain the procedure, how employees in your company track and report time
today.
Explanation: For example, how do your developers in Research & Development determine
the time available for their projects: manually on paper, manually in Excel and so on?
A:
A:
Q: 11) Are there special conditions for labor costs when employees work in different
countries or for different profit centers (for example, if an employee from the UK works on a
project in Germany)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 13) How do your employees enter trip costs? Are the trips linked to the recording of
working time? Describe in detail.
A:
A:
Q: 15) Identify the different categories of activity (activity types) that you use for estimation,
planning and settlement purposes?
A:
Q: 16) What are the various cost collectors, to which employees will charge time (for
example, cost centers, projects, internal orders)?
A:
Q: 17) Do sub-contractors and other third party labor sources have to enter work using
timesheets?
A:
Q: 18) Are these external services settled to a cost center or directly to the project?
A:
A:
Q: 20) How is the cost of overtime calculated? Do you have different types of overtime (for
example, time and a half, double time)?
A:
Q: 21) Do you track indirect labor hours, such as vacation, sickness, holiday...? If yes,
define the categories you require and their entry type.
A:
Q: 22) Which financial entries do you currently make for your labor distribution?
A:
Q: 23) How do employees record their working time (time, detail, medium/system)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) What is your current timesheet approval strategy for employees and external
services?
A:
Q: 2) Explain the permit procedure for working time or recording of activity allocation for
your employees.
A:
A:
Q: 4) How many employees does the person responsible for approval manage?
Explanation: Consider using the CATS workflow to automate the approval process.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to transfer recorded activity allocations to Controlling using the time
sheet?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 2) How often does this transfer take place (daily, weekly and so on)?
A:
Q: 3) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,
employee hours by cost center)?
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization,
employee hours by cost center)?
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
A:
Q: 3) Do you need an evaluation, do see the days on which personnel enter more than a
defined number of hours?
A:
Q: 4) Do you have to see the employee name in the documents for the receiving
component?
A:
Q: 5) Do different roles need to see different timesheet information? (If yes, create report
variants.)
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you record technical information (for example, which part of the equipment was
broken, damage, cause of damage) about a customer problem in order to create a service
history or to enable further evaluations?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Explanation: In the notification, the completion confirmation, or when the order is technically
completed?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 4) Do you want to have a coding system, which allows standardized entry of technical
information? If yes, list the different categories (for example, damage), for which you want to
have codes.
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you measure and record the current condition of your equipment in the system (for
example, temperature, pressure, operating time)? Describe the different measuring points
and counters that you require for the different pieces of equipment.
A:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
Q: 3) How often and according to which rules do you want to settle orders ?
A:
Q: 4) Do you want to examine your cost elements for the settlement of orders in greater
detail?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 5) Do you analyze the profitability of single service contracts, including all related service
costs and service revenues?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 6) Do you intend to have service profitability analysis or profit center analysis within your
company?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Who decides whether the work is fully completed (business completion) and when?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you want to archive orders? If so, please provide a copy of your document
archiving policy. If this is not available, describe specific archiving requirements.
A:
Q: 2) How long do you want to retain orders in the system before they are archived?
A:
A:
Questions:
Q: 1) Do you create historical orders to track service work, which has already been
completed?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
6.5.12. Billing
6.5.12.1. Credit Memo Request Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) Do your debit and credit notes (memos) need to go through an approval process? If
so, describe it.
A:
Q: 2) Are credit/debit notes linked to previous documents (for example, orders, invoices)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
6.5.12.2. Billing Request Processing
Questions:
Q: 1) Which department is responsible for billing the customer (for example, service
department, accounting department)?
A:
Q: 2) Do you already carry out resource-related billing? Do you use transaction VA90 in the
process?
Explanation: We recommend you create the billing request in resource-related billing using
transaction DP90 (in CS) or DP91 (in SD). Recommended procedure in the switch from VA90
to DP90/DP91: (1) Bill old orders to completion (2) Bill new orders with DP90/DP91 In certain
circumstandes, periodically billed orders require the use of a conversion program (for more
details, see the documentation or release notes for 4.5 and 4.6). release notes for 4.5 and
4.6).
A:
Q: 3) Do you bill your services at different percentage rates (for example, service hours at
100%, material at 50%)?
A:
Q: 4) Do you invoice the customer periodically for the service contract, and if so, how long
is the period?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 5) If you only invoice the customer once, what other criteria do you use to decide when
an invoice is sent to the customer (for example, operating time of equipment)?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 6) When do you create the invoices for the customer (for example, at the end of each
period, or on specific dates defined by the customer)?
A:
Q: 7) Does the customer receive one invoice per service contract, or is there one invoice for
several contracts?
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 9) Do you need the detailed information from the CO line items or is it enough to bill
summarized CO totals records?)
Explanation: System performance is better when summarized CO totals records are billed.
A:
Explanation: Dynamic Item Processor (DIP): If you are generating a debit memo request
only, positive and negative expenditures are cleared against each other. If a debit and credit
memo requests are being generated, positive and negative expenditures can be displayed
separately. displayed separately.
A:
A:
Explanation: For example, determine materials using the cost center or a cost element/cost
center/activity type combination.
A:
Explanation: For example: actual costs, statistical key figures, or cash payments. You can
combine the sources. There is a customer exit you can use to define your own sources.
define your own sources.
A:
Q: 14) Do you want to define a particular default rate (in %) for particular sources of
expense requiring billing? If yes, define the sources and the relevant percentages.
A:
Q: 15) Do you use specific accounting indicators when confirming expenses (examples:
guarantees or grace periods)? If yes, which?
A:
A:
6.5.12.3. Resource-Related Billing
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 23) Do you bill customers on a time and material basis? (If yes, consider using resource-
related billing.)
A:
Q: 24) Do you bill internal labor at an hourly, daily rate etc? (If yes, you need to enter the
activity types in Customizing for expense-related billing.)
A:
Q: 25) Describe the different ways that labor and expense are billed for your projects e.g. is
labor billed at fixed billing rates, or as a straight cost plus a markup, or a combination of both,
etc.
A:
Q: 26) Describe your billing process. How often are time and material invoices issued?
A:
Q: 27) It is important to consider which items appear in a billing document and the
accounting treatment for them. Describe the accounting processes used for time and
material-related billing in your projects.
A:
Q: 28) What is the relationship between activities reported against a project and activities
billed to the customer?
Explanation: If there is a difference, consider how the price list is used in SD or how a user
exit determines a price.
A:
Q: 29) If subcontractors are used, are they billed as an expense or as internal labor?
A:
Q: 30) Do you use time and material-related billing? Do you exclude some expenses from
projects from billing?
A:
Q: 31) Are the time and materials cost marked up in price for billing?
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 33) If so, describe the way caps are applied e.g. on the total of labor and expense, on
specific expenses etc.
A:
Q: 34) Is there an approval process for these project invoices? (If yes, consider using
workflow and involving the project manager in the process.)
A:
Q: 35) Do you show detailed info in the invoice for time and material-related billing?
Provide us with examples. (If yes, consider using project reports to support the detail
required.)
A:
Q: 36) Do you post actual revenues, discounts, or allowances to your project? (If yes,
consider the accounts and the implications for value categories in project reporting.)
A:
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Are billing documents created individually (one billing document per sales order or
delivery) or collectively (one or more billing document for several orders or deliveries)?
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 3) Which documents are your billing documents based on (e.g. order, delivery)? Please
describe in detail.
Explanation: Note: Answer the same question for all other transactions such as returns,
credit memos, debit memos, and normal sales.
A:
Q: 4) Are billing documents processed online or in batch? Describe the process for
reviewing exception messages/error logs.
A:
A:
Q: 6) Do customers have a predefined time when they receive invoices (billing schedules)?
Explanation: Note: In the customer master, you can specify a special calendar so that
invoices can only be created on particular days. However, you should restrict the number of
different calendars.
A:
Q: 7) In which cases do you combine or split orders/deliveries into invoices? Describe your
consolidation/split criteria (e.g. payment terms, customer, export data).
Explanation: Note: The standard R/3 system always attempts to merge deliveries with certain
identical header data (such as identical partners, Incoterms, terms of payment, etc.). You can
program additional merging or splitting criteria into the copying control between delivery and
invoice.
A:
Q: 8) What type of billing documents are created (e.g. invoice, pro forma invoice, credit
notes, debit notes, export invoice)?
A:
A:
Q: 10) Periodic billing allows a specified amount to be billed over a certain time period. Do
you utilize periodic billing (e.g. for rental contract type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
A:
Q: 12) Milestone billing allows you to bill once a certain work level has been reached. Do
you use milestone billing (e.g. for make-to-order type documents)?
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Q: 13) How are prices copied from sales documents to billing documents?
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 14) In what cases can quantity differences occur between sales documents and billing
documents? (for example, price changes, currency fluctuations, taxes, inflationary
adjustments)?
A:
Q: 15) What are the reasons you would ever block a delivery from creating an invoice?
A:
Q: 16) What types of text are required in your billing documents? Are they required on
output?
Explanation: Note: Decide how each text type will be filled. For example, a text can be
copied from the customer master, material master, preceding document, or standard text. In
addition, INCLUDE commands must be added to billing documents for all text types that you
want to print.
A:
Q: 17) What information is required in your lists of deliveries due for billing (billing due list)?
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. For example, you can add or
delete columns.
A:
Explanation: Note: These lists can be modified to some extent. You can add or remove
columns.
A:
Q: 19) When do you want to post accounting for your sales invoices (e.g. immediately, after
review)?
A:
Q: 20) Which information is required for the accounting document (for example, reference
number)?
A:
A:
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 23) Describe the different types of periodic billing that you use.
A:
Q: 24) Describe the billing process for these types of bills. Are they reviewed or approved
by project managers prior to being issued?
A:
Q: 25) Do you bill customers based on a schedule such as monthly, quarterly or some other
specified timing? (If yes, consider running the billing due list for projects according to this
schedule.)
A:
Q: 26) Is your billing based on milestones? (If yes, consider PS-milestone functions.)
A:
Q: 27) Milestone billing allows you to control a bill release on the project side. Who is
responsible for approving the draft invoice?
A:
Q: 28) Is your billing related to a specific delivery? (If yes, consider using a milestone to
control the release of invoices as deliveries are confirmed. Also consider structuring the
invoice so that it relates to the delivery schedule.)
A:
Q: 29) Is your billing based on fixed amounts or a percentage of order? (If yes, consider this
when structuring the billing plan in your project.)
A:
Q: 30) Is your billing based on the percentage of completion? (If yes, consider using
milestones to calculate the POC and to control billing).
A:
Q: 31) Is your billing based on percentage of completion? (If yes, consider using earned
value analysis milestone technique to calculate the percentage of completion and control the
billing.)
A:
Q: 32) Do you post actual revenues, discounts, or allowances to your project? (If yes,
consider the accounts and the implications for value categories in project reporting.)
A:
Requirement Gathering Questions
Q: 33) It is important to consider which items appear in a billing document and the
accounting treatment for them. Describe the accounting processes used for time and
material-related billing in your projects.
A:
Questions:
A:
A:
A:
A: [ ]Yes
[ ]No
Questions:
A:
Q: 2) Please describe in detail the different analyses/reports that you will use.
Explanation: For each report, specify the receiver of the report, the reporting frequency and
content of the report. The content should describe the key figures of the report and state the
different levels, at which these key figures are aggregated.
A: